Motorola Mobility T56CA1 Portable Cellular/PCS Transceiver (AMPS/TDMA) User Manual CC EX08
Motorola Mobility LLC Portable Cellular/PCS Transceiver (AMPS/TDMA) CC EX08
Contents
- 1. Exhibit 8 Users Manual
- 2. Exhibit 08a Amendment Users Manual
Exhibit 8 Users Manual
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg1.png)
APPLICANT: MOTOROLA, INC. FCC ID: IHDT56CA1
EXHIBIT 8
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A preliminary draft copy of the Users Manual follows:
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg2.png)
1
PRELIMINARY
Motorola V120t
(Tarpon)
TDMA R1.3
Mobile Phone User’s Guide
Technical Review Draft
February 8, 2002
Changes to TDMA R1.3 Files:
•
“Menu Map” chapter. Changed “Message” menu
option order.
•
“Menu Map” chapter. Added “Ring Styles” to main
menu, removed “Ring/Vibrate” from Settings menu.
•
“Menu Map” chapter. Added “Location” feature to the
Settings menu for Tarpon V120x phones.
•
“Menu Map” chapter. Added “TTY Setup” to the Initial
Setup menu.
•
“Getting Started”/“Charging the Battery” section.
Rewrote first paragraph as required (new boilerplate
text).
•
“About Your Phone” chapter. Changed ring or vibrate
alert references to “ring styles.”
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg3.png)
2
PRELIMINARY
•
“About Your Phone”/“Battery Use” section. Added new
intro paragraph (new boilerplate text), and the
“Extending Battery Life” section.
•
“Sending and Receiving Calls”/“Dialing With One-
Touch Dial” section. Rewrote voicemail
description.
•
“Entering Text”/“Tap Method”/“General Text Entry
Rules” section. Rewrote text entry callouts (Phoenix
and Tarpon phones) to document cursor left/right
movement in numeric mode.
•
“Menu Feature Descriptions” chapter. Moved “Ring/
Vibrate” up to a top-level menu feature, renamed it to
“Ring Styles.”
•
“Menu Feature Descriptions”/“Settings Menu”/“Phone
Status” section. Added “Active Line” feature
description.
•
“Menu Feature Descriptions” chapter. Added “TTY
Setup” feature description to the “Initial Setup”
section.
•
“Phonebook”/“Storing a Phonebook Entry” section.
Added procedural steps that describe how to turn on/
off distinctive ringer ID tones (TDMA phones).
•
“Phonebook”/“Storing a Phonebook Entry” section.
Added procedural steps that describe how to create
multiple phonebook entries for a single name.
•
“Messages - Voicemail”/“Storing Your Voicemail
Number” section and “Listening to a Voicemail
Message” section. Rewrote text related to storing the
voicemail number as phonebook entry number 1.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg4.png)
3
PRELIMINARY
•
“Messages-Voicemail”/“Receiving a New Voicemail
Message” section. Second paragraph, rewrote
reminders interval description, eliminated
reference to “every five minutes.”
•
“Messages - Text”/”Setting Up the Text Message
Inbox” section. Added procedural steps that
describe how to turn on/off SMS Alerts during a voice
call (TDMA phones).
•
“Messages-Text”/“Receiving a Text Message” section.
Second paragraph, changed reminders interval
description, eliminated reference to “every five
minutes.”
•
“Messages-Text”/“Reading, Locking, or Deleting a Text
Message” section. Added new indicators to first
procedure step. Moved the “Create Message” option
to the top of the Text Msg Menu table.
•
“Messages - Text” chapter. Added new section
“Storing Sounds From a Text Message” (TDMA
phones).
•
Added new “Ring Styles” chapter.
•
“Ring Styles”/“Setting Reminders” section. Changed
reminders interval description, eliminated reference to
“every five minutes.”
•
“Ring Styles”/“Customizing a Ring Style”/“Activate and
Deactivate Ringer IDs” section added (TDMA
phones).
•
“Browser” chapter. Added new section “Downloading
Sounds” (TDMA phones).
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg5.png)
4
PRELIMINARY
•
“Games” chapter. Rewrote existing descriptions for
“BlackJack,” “MindBlaster,” and “Paddleball.” Added
new descriptions for “Falling Numbers,” “Reversal,”
and “Video Poker.” (New descriptions added as
appropriate for specific CDMA and TDMA
phones.)
•
“Adjusting Your Settings” chapter. Removed “Ring/
Vibrate” and “Reminders” sections, created new “Ring
Styles” chapter for those topics.
•
“Adjusting Your Settings”/“Use the My Tones Feature”
section. Added new “Downloading Tones” section
(TDMA phones).
•
“Adjusting Your Settings” chapter. Added new “TTY
Operation” section.
•
“Troubleshooting” chapter. Added new “TTY” note.
•
“Troubleshooting” chapter. Added new text about the
backlight affecting battery life.
•
“Troubleshooting” chapter. Updated references to
“Ring Styles” feature.
•
“Programming Instructions” chapter. Rewrote
instructions to support dual NAM programming.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg6.png)
1
PRELIMINARY
Welcome
Welcome to the world of Motorola digital wireless
communications! We are pleased that you have chosen
the Motorola V120t wireless phone.
Antenna
Display
Headset Jack
Insert headset
accessory.
End Key
End phone calls,
exit menu system.
Left Soft Key
Perform functions
identified by left
display prompt.
Earpiece
Menu Key
Voice Key
Record voice notes,
phonebook and
shortcut names.
Right Soft Key
Perform functions
identified by right
display prompt.
Send Key
Send and answer
calls, view recent
dialed calls list.
Accessory
Connector Port
Insert charger and
phone accessories.
Microphone
Power Key
Volume Keys
Adjust earpiece
and ringer volume.
Scroll Keys
Move through
menus and lists.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg7.png)
2
PRELIMINARY
Personal Communications Sector
600 North U.S. Highway 45
Libertyville, Illinois 60048
1-800-331-6456 (United States)
1-888-390-6456 (TTY/TDD United States)
1-800-461-4575 (Canada)
www.motorola.com
(United States)
www.motorola.ca
(Canada)
MOTOROLA, the Stylized M Logo and all other trademarks indicated
as such herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. ® Reg. U.S. Pat. &
Tm. Off. TrueSync, Sidekick, Starfish, and the Stylized Starfish Logo
are registered trademarks of Starfish Software, Inc., a wholly owned
independent subsidiary of Motorola, Inc. All other product or service
names are the property of their respective owners.
© 2002 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved.
Software Copyright Notice
The Motorola products described in this manual may include
copyrighted Motorola and third party software stored in semiconductor
memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other
countries preserve for Motorola and third party software providers
certain exclusive rights for copyrighted software, such as the exclusive
rights to distribute or reproduce the copyrighted software. Accordingly,
any copyrighted software contained in the Motorola products may not
be modified, reverse-engineered, distributed, or reproduced in any
manner to the extent allowed by law. Furthermore, the purchase of the
Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by
implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights,
patents, or patent applications of Motorola or any third party software
provider, except for the normal, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to
use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Manual number: 6809438A79-O
Cover number: 8988485L49-O
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg8.png)
✂
3
PRELIMINARY
Menu Map
Main Menu
• Recent Calls
•Received Calls
•Dialed Calls
•Notepad
•Call Times
• Phonebook
• Datebook
• Quick Dial
• Radio
• Messages
•Text Msgs
•Create Msg
•Voicemail
•Browser Alerts
•Quick Notes
•Outbox
•Drafts
• Ring Styles
•Style
•Style Detail
•My Tones
• Shortcuts
• Voice Notes
• Browser
• Calculator
• Games
• Settings
(see next page)
Shortcuts
Change display zoom:
Press
M
, then
press and hold
M
Lock/unlock keypad:
Press
M
*
Display my phone number:
Press
M
#
Go to dialed calls list:
Press
N
Exit menu system:
Press
O
Note: This is the standard phone
menu layout. You or your service
provider may have changed the
menu layout or changed some
feature names. Not all features
may be available for all users.
For example, the Radio feature on
the main menu (left) is displayed
only when the optional FM Stereo
Radio Headset accessory is
plugged into the accessory
connector port on your phone
(see phone illustration, page 1).
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg9.png)
✂
4
PRELIMINARY
Settings Menu
• Phone Status
•My Tel. Number
•Active Line
•Battery Meter
•Other Information
• Connection
•Incoming Call
• In-Call Setup
•In-Call Timer
•Answer Options
• Security
•Phone Lock
•Lock Keypad
•Lock Application
•Talk Secure
•Restrict Calls
•New Passwords
• Other Settings
•Personalize
•Main Menu
•Keys
•Greeting
•Quick Dial
•Initial Setup
•Time and Date
•Auto PIN Dial
•Auto Redial
•Backlight
•Zoom
•TTY Setup
•Scroll
•Animation
•Language
•Battery Save
•Contrast
•DTMF
•Master Reset
•Master Clear
•Network
•Car Settings
•Headset
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bga.png)
5
PRELIMINARY
Contents
Contents
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Safety and General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
What’s in the Box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Installing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Turning Your Phone On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Sending a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ending a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Receiving a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
About Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Changing the Zoom Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Volume Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Battery Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Sending and Receiving Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Redialing a Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Using Automatic Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Talk Secure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Returning an Unanswered Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Dialing an Emergency Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Terminating an Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Dialing With Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Dialing With One-Touch Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Dialing a Number In a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgb.png)
6
PRELIMINARY
Contents
Additional Dialing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Using Features While On a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Making a Three-Way Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Additional On-Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using the Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Navigating to a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Selecting a Feature Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Entering Feature Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Entering Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Choosing a Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Tap Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Symbol Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Predictive Text Entry with iTAP™ Software . . . . . . . . 46
Menu Feature Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Recent Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Viewing the Received Calls or Dialed Calls List . . . . 63
Using the Notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Viewing and Resetting Call Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Fields in a Phonebook Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Storing a Phonebook Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Recording a Voice Name For a Phonebook Entry . . . 70
Dialing a Phonebook Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Editing a Phonebook Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Deleting a Phonebook Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Checking Phonebook Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Sorting the Phonebook List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Datebook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Week View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Day View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgc.png)
7
PRELIMINARY
Contents
Event View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Storing a Datebook Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Changing Event Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Copying an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Deleting an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Turning the Radio On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Tuning a Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Storing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Selecting a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Sending and Receiving Calls With the Radio On . . . . 81
Messages—Voicemail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Storing Your Voicemail Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Receiving a Voicemail Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Listening to a Voicemail Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Messages—Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Setting Up the Text Message Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Receiving a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Reading, Locking, or Deleting a Text Message . . . . . 87
Storing Sounds From a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Sending a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Sending a Quick Note Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Viewing the Status of Sent Text Messages . . . . . . . . .94
Ring Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Selecting a Ring Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Customizing a Ring Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Using My Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Setting Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Standard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Creating a Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgd.png)
8
PRELIMINARY
Contents
Using Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Voice Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Recording a Voice Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Viewing the Voice Notes List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Playing a Voice Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Locking and Unlocking a Voice Note . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Deleting a Voice Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Micro-Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Starting a Micro-Browser Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Interacting With Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Downloading a Sound File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Calculating Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Converting Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Playing a Game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Game Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Blackjack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Falling Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Video Poker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Adjusting Your Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Reordering Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Customizing a Soft Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
TTY Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Hands-Free Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Data Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Connecting Your Phone to an External Device . . . . 131
Sending a Data Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Receiving a Data Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Assigning a New Code or Password . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bge.png)
9
PRELIMINARY
Contents
If You Forget a Code or Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Locking and Unlocking Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Locking and Unlocking Your Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Restricting Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Activating Talk Secure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Programming Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Specific Absorption Rate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Additional Health and Safety Information . . . . . . . .157
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Product Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Export Law Assurances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Wireless Phone Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgf.png)
10
PRELIMINARY
About This Guide
About This Guide
This user guide introduces you to the many features in
your Motorola wireless phone.
Navigating To a Menu Feature
You can access many of your phone’s features through the
menu system. This guide shows you how to navigate to a
specific menu feature as follows:
The > symbol means that you should scroll to and select
the feature. This example shows that you must press
M
,
scroll to and select
Messages
, then scroll to and select
Text Msgs
.
Optional Features
Features marked with this label are optional
network and/or subscription-dependent
features. These features may not be offered by
all service providers in all geographical areas.
Contact your service provider for more information.
Optional Accessories
Features marked with this label require the use of
an optional Motorola Original™ accessory.
Find the Feature
M
>
Messages
>
Text Msgs
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg10.png)
11
PRELIMINARY
Safety and General Information
Safety and General
Information
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT
OPERATION. READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING
YOUR PHONE.
The information provided in this document supersedes the
general safety information contained in user guides published
prior to July 2000. For information regarding radio use in a
hazardous atmosphere please refer to the Factory Mutual
(FM) Approval Manual Supplement or Instruction Card, which
is included with radio models that offer this capability.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
RF Operational Characteristics
Your phone contains a transmitter and a receiver. When it is
ON, it receives and transmits radio frequency (RF) energy.
The phone operates in the frequency range of 824 MHz to
849 MHz in analog and digital mode and 1850 MHz to 1910
MHz in digital mode.
When you communicate with your phone, the system handling
your call controls the power levels at which your phone
transmits. The output power level typically may vary over a
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg11.png)
12
PRELIMINARY
Safety and General Information
range from ____ watts to ____ watts in analog mode and
____ watts to ____ watts in digital mode.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Energy
Your Motorola phone is designed to comply with the
following national and international standards and
guidelines regarding exposure of human beings to radio
frequency electromagnetic energy:
•United States Federal Communications Commission,
Code of Regulations; 47 CFR part 2 sub-part J
•American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute
of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.
1-1992
•Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
C95.1-1999 Edition
•National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurements (NCRP) of the United States, Report 86,
1986
•International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection (ICNIRP) 1998
•Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6. Limits of
Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic
Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz,
1999
•Australian Communications Authority
Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic
Radiation-Human Exposure) Standard 1999
To assure optimal phone performance and make sure human
exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy is within
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg12.png)
13
PRELIMINARY
Safety and General Information
the guidelines set forth in the above standards, always adhere
to the following procedures:
Portable Phone Operation and EME
Exposure
Antenna Care
Use only the supplied or an approved replacement
antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or
attachments could damage the phone and may violate FCC
regulations.
Do NOT hold the antenna when the phone is in use.
Holding the antenna affects call quality and may cause the
phone to operate at a higher power level than needed.
Phone Operation
When placing or receiving a phone call, hold your phone as
you would a wireline telephone. Speak directly into the
microphone.
Body-Worn Operation
To maintain compliance with FCC/Health Canada RF
exposure guidelines, if you wear a phone on your body when
transmitting, always place the phone in a Motorola-supplied or
approved clip, holder, holster, case, or body harness for this
product. Use of non-Motorola-approved accessories may
exceed FCC/Health Canada RF exposure guidelines. If you
do not use one of the Motorola-supplied or approved
body-worn accessories, and are not using the phone held in
the normal use position, ensure the phone and its antenna
are at least one inch (2.5 centimeters) from your body
when transmitting.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg13.png)
14
PRELIMINARY
Safety and General Information
Data Operation
When using any data feature of the phone, with or without an
accessory cable, position the phone and its antenna at
least one inch (2.5 centimeters) from your body.
Approved Accessories
For a list of approved Motorola accessories, visit our website
at
www.mot.com
.
Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility
Note: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to
electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded,
designed, or otherwise configured for electromagnetic
compatibility.
Facilities
To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility
conflicts, turn off your phone in any facility where posted
notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities
may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF
energy.
Aircraft
When instructed to do so, turn off your phone when on board
an aircraft. Any use of a phone must be in accordance with
applicable regulations per airline crew instructions.
Medical Devices
Pacemakers
The Advanced Medical Technology Association recommends
that a minimum separation of 6 inches (15 centimeters) be
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg14.png)
15
PRELIMINARY
Safety and General Information
maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a
pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the
independent research by, and recommendations of, the
United States Food and Drug Administration.
Persons with pacemakers should:
•ALWAYS keep the phone more than six inches
(15 centimeters) from your pacemaker when the phone is
turned ON.
•NOT carry the phone in the breast pocket.
•use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the
potential for interference.
•turn OFF the phone immediately if you have any reason
to suspect that interference is taking place.
Hearing Aids
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing
aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to
consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical device, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately
shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist
you in obtaining this information.
Safety and General Use While Driving
Check the laws and regulations on the use of phones in the
area where you drive. Always obey them.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg15.png)
16
PRELIMINARY
Safety and General Information
When using your phone while driving, please:
•give full attention to driving and to the road.
•use hands-free operation, if available.
•pull off the road and park before making or answering
a call if driving conditions so require.
Operational Warnings
For Vehicles With an Air Bag
Do not place a portable phone in the area over an air bag or in
the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force.
If a portable phone is placed in the air bag deployment area
and the air bag inflates, the phone may be propelled with
great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the
vehicle.
Potentially Explosive Atmospheres
Turn off your phone prior to entering any area with a
potentially explosive atmosphere, unless the phone is a model
specifically identified as being “Intrinsically Safe.” Do not
remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a
potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or
fire resulting in bodily injury or even death.
Note: The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres
referred to above include fueling areas such as below decks
on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, areas
where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain,
dust, or metal powders, and any other area where you would
normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Areas with
potentially explosive atmospheres are often but not always
posted.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg16.png)
17
PRELIMINARY
Safety and General Information
Blasting Caps and Areas
To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn
OFF your phone when you are near electrical blasting
caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: “Turn off
two-way radio.” Obey all signs and instructions.
Operational Cautions
Antennas
Do not use any portable phone that has a damaged
antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with your
skin, a minor burn can result.
Batteries
All batteries can cause property damage and/or bodily injury
such as burns if a conductive material such as jewelry, keys,
or beaded chains touches exposed terminals. The conductive
material may complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and
become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any charged
battery, particularly when placing it inside a pocket, purse, or
other container with metal objects.
ITC01-101
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg17.png)
18
PRELIMINARY
Getting Started
Getting Started
What’s in the Box?
Your wireless phone typically comes equipped with a
battery and a charger. Other accessory options can
customize your phone for maximum performance and
portability.
To purchase Motorola Original™ accessories, contact the
Motorola Customer Call Center at 1-800-331-6456 in the
United States or 1-800-461-4575 in Canada.
Installing the Battery
You must install and charge the battery to use your phone.
Your phone is designed to be used only with
Motorola Original batteries and accessories. We
recommend that you store batteries in their
protective cases when not in use.
Do This
1Remove the battery from its protective clear
plastic case.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg18.png)
19
PRELIMINARY
Getting Started
Charging the Battery
New batteries are shipped partially charged. Before
you can use your phone, you need to install and charge
the battery, as indicated by the following instructions.
2If the phone’s
battery door is in
place, slide down
the release latch
and lift the door off
of the phone.
3Insert the battery,
printed arrows
first, into the
battery
compartment and
push down.
4Replace the battery door.
Do This
Release
latch
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg19.png)
20
PRELIMINARY
Getting Started
Some batteries perform best after several full charge/
discharge cycles.
Note: When you charge the battery, the battery level
indicator in the upper right corner of the display shows how
much of the charging process is complete.
Turning Your Phone On
Do This
1Plug the
travel
charger into
your phone
with the
release tab
facing up.
2Plug the other end of the travel charger into the
appropriate electrical outlet.
3When your phone indicates that the battery is
fully charged (
Charge Complete
), press the
release tab and remove the travel charger.
Do This To
1Press and hold
P
turn on your phone
Release
tab
Power
key
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg1a.png)
21
PRELIMINARY
Getting Started
Sending a Call
To call a number, your phone must be unlocked and have a
network connection with adequate signal strength.
Note: You can make an emergency call even when the
phone is locked. See “Dialing an Emergency Number” on
page 30.
2If necessary, enter
your four-digit
unlock code and
press
OK
(
+
)
unlock your phone
The unlock code is
originally set to 1234. Your
service provider may
change this number
before you receive your
phone.
Press To
1keypad keys dial the phone number
Tip: If you make a mistake,
press
DELETE
(
-
) to delete
the last digit, or press and
hold
DELETE
(
-
) to clear all
digits.
2
N
send the call
Do This To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg1b.png)
22
PRELIMINARY
Getting Started
Ending a Call
Receiving a Call
To receive a call, your phone must have a network
connection with adequate signal strength. If your phone is
locked, you must unlock it to answer the call.
When you receive a call, your phone rings and/or vibrates
and displays an incoming call message.
Displaying Your Phone Number
From the idle display:
Press To
O
end the call
Press To
N
or
ANSWER
(
+
)answer the call
Press To
M
#
see your phone number
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg1c.png)
23
PRELIMINARY
About Your Phone
About Your Phone
See page 1 for a basic phone diagram.
Display
Phone status indicators appear at the top of the display.
Messages, phone numbers, and menu options appear
below the status indicators.
Labels at the bottom corners of the display show the
current soft key functions. When you see the
M
(menu)
indicator at the bottom center of the display, you can press
M
to open the main menu or a feature sub-menu.
Some phone functions must be performed from the idle
display, the standard display that you see when you are
not on a call or using the menu.
12:00am
➒
Clock
➐
Battery
Level
Indicator
➌
In Use
Indicator
➍
Roam
Indicator
➎
Message Waiting
Indicator
➏
Voice Message
Waiting Indicator
➑
Menu Indicator
➓
Ring Style
Indicator
➊
Signal
Strength
Indicator
➋
Digital/
Analog
Signal
Indicator
➋
Digital/
Analog
Signal
Indicator
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg1d.png)
24
PRELIMINARY
About Your Phone
➊ Signal Strength Indicator Vertical bars show the
strength of the network connection. You cannot send or
receive calls when the
j
(no signal) indicator is
displayed.
➋ Digital (
F
) or Analog (
I
) Signal
Indicators Your service provider may use
one or both indicators to show whether you
are receiving a digital or analog signal.
➌ In Use Indicator Shows that a call is in progress.
➍ Roam Indicator Shows that your phone is
seeking or using another network system
outside your home network.
➎ Message Waiting Indicator Appears when
you receive a text message.
➏ Voice Message Waiting Indicator Appears
when you receive a voicemail message.
➐ Battery Level Indicator Vertical bars show the amount
of charge left in your battery. Recharge the battery as soon
as possible when your phone displays
Low Battery
and
you hear the low battery alert.
➑ Menu Indicator Shows that you can press
M
to
open a menu.
➒ Clock Shows the current time.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg1e.png)
25
PRELIMINARY
About Your Phone
➓ Ring Style Indicator Shows the current selected ring
style. The default setting is a ringer.
Changing the Zoom Setting
You can set your phone’s display to show three lines or two
lines of text plus soft key labels. Three lines of text display
more information, while two lines increase text size.
To change the display view, press
M
once, then press
and hold
M
again within two seconds of the first press.
You can also adjust the zoom setting from the menu. See
the “Zoom” option on page 59.
Volume
Keys
Use the upper and
lower volume keys to
adjust your phone’s
earpiece and ringer
volume.
w
= loud ring
x
= soft ring
y
= vibrate
u
= ring and vibrate
t
= silent
When Press To
you are in a call volume
keys
increase or decrease
earpiece volume
the idle display
is showing
volume
keys
increase or decrease
ringer volume
Volume
keys
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg1f.png)
26
PRELIMINARY
About Your Phone
Battery Use
Battery performance depends on many factors,
including your wireless carrier’s network configuration;
signal strength; the temperature at which you operate
your phone; the features and/or settings you select and
use; and your voice, data, and other application usage
patterns.
Battery Care
Caution: To prevent injuries or burns, do not allow metal
objects to contact or short-circuit the battery terminals.
To maximize your battery’s performance:
•Always use Motorola Original™ batteries and battery
chargers. The phone warranty does not cover damage
caused from using non-Motorola batteries and/or
battery chargers.
•New batteries or batteries that have been stored for
long periods of time may require a longer charge time.
•Maintain the battery at or near room temperature
when charging.
•Do not expose batteries to temperatures below -10°C
(14°F) or above 45°C (113°F). Always take your
phone with you when you leave your vehicle.
•When you do not intend to use a battery for a while,
store it uncharged in a cool, dark, dry place, such as a
refrigerator.
•Over extended periods of time, batteries gradually
wear down and require longer charging times. This is
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg20.png)
27
PRELIMINARY
About Your Phone
normal. If you charge your battery regularly and notice
a decrease in talk time or an increase in charging
time, then it is probably time to purchase a new
battery.
The rechargeable batteries that power this
product must be disposed of properly and
may need to be recycled. Refer to your battery’s
label for battery type. Contact your local recycling center
for proper disposal methods. Never dispose of batteries in
a fire because they may explode.
Extending Battery Life
• Talk less or send fewer messages
It’s simple, but the more you talk or send text or chat
messages, the more battery power you use.
• Turn off your display backlight
The backlight uses power, too. To turn it off, see the
Backlight
option on page 59.
• Avoid keypad-intense functions
Activities that require intensive keystroke use (such as
playing a game or using messaging) reduce your
phone’s talk and standby time. Lock the keypad (see
page 140) when storing the phone in your purse or
pocket to avoid unnecessary keypad and backlight
activations.
• Spend less time on the Internet
Using your phone’s Internet micro-browser reduces
the phone’s talk and standby time.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg21.png)
28
PRELIMINARY
Sending and Receiving Calls
Sending and
Receiving Calls
For basic instructions on how to send a call, end a call,
and receive a call, see pages 21–22.
Redialing a Number
If you hear an ordinary busy signal:
Using Automatic Redial
If the network is busy, you hear a fast busy
signal, and your phone displays
Call Failed
.
With automatic redial, your phone automatically
repeats the call attempt for four minutes. When
the call goes through, your phone rings or vibrates one
time, displays
Redial Successful
, and then connects the
call.
You must turn on automatic redial to use the feature. See
the “Auto Redial” option on page 58.
Press To
1
O
hang up
2
N
redial the busy number
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg22.png)
29
PRELIMINARY
Sending and Receiving Calls
When automatic redial is turned off, you can manually
activate the feature to redial a phone number. When you
hear a fast busy signal and see
Call Failed
:
Caller ID
The calling line identification (caller ID) feature
displays the caller’s phone number for incoming
calls.
If the caller’s name is stored in your phonebook,
the phone displays the name. If caller ID information is not
available, the phone displays
Incoming Call
.
Talk Secure
When talk secure is activated, your phone always tries to
use a high-security connection to prevent others from
intercepting your calls. To activate the secure connection
feature, see “Activating Talk Secure” on page 141.
Note: If a high-security connection is not available, your
phone uses a standard connection. Your phone displays
the message
Line Not Secure
when using a standard
connection, unless caller ID or other information already
fills the display.
Returning an Unanswered Call
Your phone keeps a record of your unanswered calls, and
displays:
Press To
N
or
RETRY
(
+
)activate automatic redial
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg23.png)
30
PRELIMINARY
Sending and Receiving Calls
•the
T
(missed call) indicator
•
X Missed Calls
Y Unknown
, where
X
is the total
number of missed calls and
Y
is the number of
missed calls with no caller ID information
Dialing an Emergency Number
Your service provider programs one or more emergency
phone numbers, such as 911, that you can call under any
circumstances, even when your phone is locked.
Note: Emergency numbers vary by country. Your phone’s
emergency number(s) may not work in all locations.
Terminating an Incoming Call
While the phone is ringing or vibrating:
Press To
1
VIEW
(
+
)see the received calls list
2
S
select a call to return
3
N
send the call
Press To
1keypad keys dial the emergency number
2
N
call the emergency number
Press To
O
or
IGNORE
(
-
)cancel the incoming call
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg24.png)
31
PRELIMINARY
Sending and Receiving Calls
Depending on your phone settings and the type
of subscription you have with your service
provider, the call may be forwarded to
another number, or the caller may hear a
busy signal.
Dialing With Speed Dial
Each entry you store in your phonebook is assigned a
unique speed dial number. To speed dial a phonebook
entry:
Dialing With One-Touch Dial
To call phonebook entries 1 through 9, just press and hold
the one-digit speed dial number for one second.
It is recommended that you reserve phonebook entry 1
(speed dial number 1) for storing and dialing your
voicemail number. In many cases, your service provider
has already done this for you. For more information, see
page 83.
Press To
1keypad keys enter the speed dial number
for the entry you want to call
2
#
submit the number
3
N
call the entry
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg25.png)
32
PRELIMINARY
Sending and Receiving Calls
Dialing a Number In a Text
Message
To dial a phone number embedded in a text
message that you receive:
Additional Dialing Features
While dialing (with digits visible in the display), you can
open the
Dialing Menu
to perform the following tasks:
Press To
1
M
open the
Text Msg Menu
2
S
scroll to
Call Back
3
SELECT
(
+
)dial the number
Press To
M
>
Attach Number
attach a number from the
phonebook or recent call lists
M
>
Send Message
open a new text message
with the number in the
To
field
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg26.png)
33
PRELIMINARY
Sending and Receiving Calls
To insert a special character for calls that require additional
digits (for example, to make a calling card call, or to
retrieve messages from an answering machine):
Press To
M
>
Insert Pause
insert a
p
(pause) character
Your phone dials the
preceding digits, waits for the
call to connect, then sends
the remaining digit(s).
M
>
Insert Wait
insert a
w
(wait) character
Your phone dials the
preceding digits, waits for the
call to connect, then prompts
you for confirmation before it
sends the remaining digit(s).
M
>
Insert 'n'
insert an
n
(number)
character
Your phone prompts you for a
number before dialing the
call. The number you enter is
inserted into the dialing
sequence in place of the
n
character
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg27.png)
34
PRELIMINARY
Sending and Receiving Calls
You can also call a number using these features:
Do This To Call
Press and release the voice
key, then speak a voice
name (in two seconds).
a phonebook entry
using voice dial
See “Recording a
Voice Name For a
Phonebook Entry” on
page 70.
Press
M
>
Recent Calls
>
Received Calls
or
Dialed Calls
> entry to call
a missed call, or a
recent received or
dialed call
Voice
key
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg28.png)
35
PRELIMINARY
Using Features While On a Call
Using Features While
On a Call
Using Call Waiting
When you are on a call, an alert tone sounds to
indicate that you have received a second call. To
answer the second call:
Making a Three-Way Call
During a call, you can call and connect a third
party for a three-way call. You cannot do this if
you already have a call on hold.
Press To
1
N
answer the new call
2
N
switch back to the first call
Press To
1keypad keys enter the third party’s number
2
N
call the new person
3
N
connect the two calls
4
O
end the entire call
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg29.png)
36
PRELIMINARY
Using Features While On a Call
Additional On-Call Features
Press To
MUTE
(
+
) (if available) or
M
>
Mute
mute the call
SPEAKER
(
+
) (if available)
or
M
>
Spkrphone On
activate an attached
speakerphone
(hands-free mode)
M
>
My Tel. Number
view your phone number
M
>
Send Tones
send a number to the
network as DTMF tones
(for credit card or
password calls)
To activate DTMF tones,
see the “DTMF” option
on page 60.
M
>
Received Calls
or
Dialed Calls
view recent received or
dialed call numbers
M
>
Messages
view or send messages
M
>
Datebook
view datebook entries
M
>
Other Information
view phone
specifications
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg2a.png)
37
PRELIMINARY
Using the Menu
Using the Menu
Navigating to a Feature
Use these keys to move through the menu system:
Main Menu
Recent Calls
Phonebook
EXIT SELECT
Menu Key
Enter the menu
system, or open
a sub-menu,
when
M
appears in the
bottom center
of the display.
Right Soft Key
Perform the
function shown
in the lower
right corner of
the display
(usually
SELECT
the highlighted
menu item).
Left Soft Key
Perform the
function shown
in the lower left
corner of the
display (usually
EXIT
or
BACK
).
Scroll Keys
Move up or
down through
menus and lists.
*
and
#
Cycle through
and set the
value of the
highlighted
menu item.
End Key
Exit the menu
system without
making changes,
return to the
idle display.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg2b.png)
38
PRELIMINARY
Using the Menu
Selecting a Feature Option
Some features require you to select an item from a list:
•Press
S
to scroll up or down to highlight the item you
want.
•In a numbered list, press a number key to highlight the
item.
•In an alphabetized list, press a key multiple times to
cycle through the letters on the key and highlight the
closest matching list item.
Dialed Calls
10) John Smith
9) Mary Smith
BACK VIEW
Press
BACK
(
-
)
to go back to
the previous
screen.
Highlighted
item
M
Press
M
to
open the sub-menu. Press
VIEW
(
+
) to view
details of the highlighted item.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg2c.png)
39
PRELIMINARY
Using the Menu
Entering Feature Information
Some features require you to enter information :
•Enter numbers or text with the keypad.
•When an item has a list of possible values, press
*
or
#
to scroll through and select a value.
•When an item has a list of possible numeric values,
press a number key to set the value.
•If you enter or edit information and do not want to save
your changes, press
O
to exit without saving.
Entry Details
Name:John Smith
No.:2125551212
CANCEL CHANGE
Press
S
to
scroll down
to additional
items.
Highlighted
item
Press
CANCEL
(
-
) to exit
without making changes.
DONE
(
-
) appears when
you enter or edit information.
Press
CHANGE
(
+
)
to edit the
information.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg2d.png)
40
PRELIMINARY
Using the Menu
The message center lets you compose and send text
messages. A flashing cursor shows where text will appear:
When you enter text, the flashing cursor changes to a
block cursor, and the soft key functions change:
Msg:
CANCEL BROWSE
Press
BROWSE
(
+
)
to view and
insert a name,
number, or
message from
previously
stored
information.
Press
CANCEL
(
-
)
to exit without
making changes.
Flashing
cursor
indicates
insertion
point.
Press
M
to open the
sub-menu.
M
Msg:
T
DELETE OK
Press
OK
(
+
)
to accept
and store
the text.
Press
DELETE
(
-
)
to delete the character
to the left of the insertion
point.
Block
cursor
indicates
current
highlighted
character.
After two seconds, the
block cursor reverts to a
flashing cursor and moves
to the next position.
M
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg2e.png)
41
PRELIMINARY
Entering Text
Entering Text
Multiple text entry methods make it easy for you to
enter names, numbers, email addresses, and text
messages on your phone.
Choosing a Text Mode
Press
M
from any text entry screen to select the text
mode from the
Entry Method
menu:
Note: The text mode you select remains active until you
change it by selecting another mode.
iTAP
Let the phone predict each word as you
enter it (see page 46).
Tap Method
Enter letters, numbers, and symbols by
pressing a key one or more times (see
page 42).
Numeric
Enter numbers only.
Symbol
Enter symbols only (see page 45).
Browse
Browse your phonebook or recent call
lists to select a name or number.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg2f.png)
42
PRELIMINARY
Entering Text
Tap Method
This is the standard mode for entering text on your
phone.
Press
M
from any text entry screen and select the
Tap Method
menu option.
Do This To
1Press a number
key one or more
times
select a letter, number, or
symbol shown in the
“Character Chart” on page 44
2Continue
pressing number
keys
enter the remaining
characters
3Press
OK
(
+
)store the text when you are
finished
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg30.png)
43
PRELIMINARY
Entering Text
General Text Entry Rules
Press a number key repeatedly to cycle through its
characters (see “Character Chart” on page 44):
•If you do not press a key for two seconds, the
character in the block cursor is accepted, and the
cursor moves to the next position.
Msg
CANCEL BROWSE
To move the
flashing cursor
left or right
when using
tap method
:
Press these
keys.
To change a
letter in a
block cursor
to uppercase
or lowercase
when using
tap method
:
Press these
keys.
To enter text at
flashing cursor
location:
Press a number
key (as many
times as
necessary
to enter the
desired
character).
To cycle
between
tap
method
and
numeric mode
:
Press and hold
a number key.
To move the
flashing cursor
left or right in
numeric mode
:
Press these
keys.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg31.png)
44
PRELIMINARY
Entering Text
•The first character of every sentence is capitalized.
(Press
S
down to force the character to lowercase
while it is highlighted by the block cursor).
•Your phone may support multiple languages. The
current language setting determines whether a
new message begins on the left or right side of the
display.
You can switch languages within a message. Press
M
to select the text mode and language you want to
use.
Character Chart
Use this chart as a guide for entering spaces, letters,
numbers, and symbols with the tap method.
Note: This chart may not reflect the exact character set
available on your phone.
1
space . 1 ? ! , @ _ & ~ : ; "
- ( ) ' ¿ ¡ % £ $ ¥
2
a b c 2 ä å á à ã
α
β
ç
3
d e f 3
δ
é è ê
φ
4
g h i 4 í
γ
5
j k l 5
λ
6
m n o 6 ñ ö ø ó ò ô õ
ω
7
p q r s 7
π
ß σ
8
t u v 8
θ
ü ú ù
9
w x y z 9
ξ ψ
0
+ - 0 x * / \ [ ] = > < # §
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg32.png)
45
PRELIMINARY
Entering Text
Symbol Mode
Press
M
from any text entry screen and select the
Symbol
menu option.
Symbol Chart
Use this chart as a guide for entering symbols in symbol
mode.
Do This To
1Press a number
key one time
display its symbol options at
the bottom of the display (see
“Symbol Chart” on page 45)
2Press
*
or
#
or
Press the
number key
multiple times
highlight the symbol you want
3Press
SELECT
(
+
)
enter the symbol at the
flashing cursor location
1
space . ? ! , @ _
& ~ : ; " - ( ) ' ¿
¡ % £ $ ¥
2
@ _ \
3
/ : ;
4
" & '
5
( ) [ ] { }
6
¿ ¡ ~
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg33.png)
46
PRELIMINARY
Entering Text
Predictive Text Entry with
iTAP™ Software
iTAP™ software provides a predictive text entry method
that lets you enter the letters of a word using only one
keypress per letter.
Press
M
from any text entry screen and select the
iTAP
menu option.
Enter Words
7
< > =
8
$ £ ¥
9
# % *
0
+ - x * / = > <
# §
Do This To
1Press a number
key one time
enter the first letter of the
word
The letters associated with
the key are shown at the
bottom of the display.
2Press number
keys (one per
letter)
enter the rest of the word
Alternative words and letter
combinations are shown at
the bottom of the display. The
word choices are updated
with each keypress.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg34.png)
47
PRELIMINARY
Entering Text
For example, to spell the word “act,” press
2
2
8
.
The display shows:
Enter Novel Words
You may enter a word that is not in the iTAP software
dictionary. If the word you want is not displayed:
3Press
*
or
#
lhighlight the word you want
4Press
SELECT
(
+
)
enter the word at the flashing
cursor location
A space is automatically
inserted after the word.
Do This To
1Press
DELETE
(
-
)
one or more times
delete letters until you
see a letter combination
that matches the start of
the word
Do This To
Act Cat Bat Abu }
DELETE SELECT
Press
SELECT
(
+
) to
insert the highlighted word
at the insertion point.
Press
DELETE
(
-
)
to clear the last letter
entered.
Flashing
cursor
indicates
insertion
point.
Press
S
to
scroll and see
additional word
choices.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg35.png)
48
PRELIMINARY
Entering Text
Punctuation
Capitalization
The first word of a sentence is automatically capitalized,
with following words in lowercase.
2Press
*
or
#
highlight the letter or
letter combination
3Press
SELECT
(
+
),
then press
*
shift the text entry cursor
to the left and “lock” the
selected word portion
4Continue to enter
letters and highlight
letter combinations
spell the word
Press To
0
or
1
enter punctuation or other
characters as shown in the
“Character Chart” on page 44
Press To
S
change the words to initial
character capitalized, all
uppercase characters, or all
lowercase characters
Do This To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg36.png)
49
PRELIMINARY
Entering Text
Enter Numbers
Delete Letters and Words
Place the cursor to the right of the text you want to delete,
and then do the following:
Do This To
1Enter the first
digit and then
highlight it
put the iTAP software in
number entry mode
2Press number
keys
add digits to the number
3Press
SELECT
(
+
)
enter the number at the
flashing cursor location
Do This To
Press
DELETE
(
-
)delete one letter at a time
Hold
DELETE
(
-
)delete the entire message
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg37.png)
50
PRELIMINARY
Menu Feature Descriptions
Menu Feature
Descriptions
This chapter describes all of your phone’s features in
order of the menu map shown on pages 3–4.
Main Menu
R
ECENT
C
ALLS
Received Calls
M
>
Recent Calls
>
Received Calls
View a list of recently received calls. See “Viewing
the Received Calls or Dialed Calls List” on page 63.
Dialed Calls
M
>
Recent Calls
>
Dialed Calls
View a list of recently dialed calls. See “Viewing the
Received Calls or Dialed Calls List” on page 63.
Notepad
M
>
Recent Calls
>
Notepad
Call or store the last number entered on the keypad.
See “Terminating an Incoming Call” on page 30 and
“Using the Notepad” on page 64.
Call Times
M
>
Recent Calls
>
Call Times
View call timers that track time spent on your last
call, dialed calls, received calls, all calls since reset,
and all calls total. See “Viewing and Resetting Call
Timers” on page 65.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg38.png)
51
PRELIMINARY
Menu Feature Descriptions
P
HONEBOOK
M
>
Phonebook
Store names and numbers as entries in your
phonebook, then call numbers by selecting them
from the phonebook list. See “Phonebook” on
page 67.
D
ATEBOOK
M
>
Datebook
Use the datebook calendar to schedule and review
your appointments. See “Datebook” on page 75.
Q
UICK
D
IAL
M
>
Quick Dial
Dial pre-programmed numbers. Your
service provider may program your phone
with one or more quick dial numbers, such
as the customer service number. You can call them
by selecting them from the quick dial list.
Note: Your service provider may use a different
name for this feature.
R
ADIO
M
>
Radio
Listen to FM radio stations with the optional
Motorola Original™ FM Stereo Radio
Headset accessory. This menu feature is
displayed only when the FM Stereo Radio Headset
is plugged into the accessory connector port on
your phone. See “Radio” on page 80.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg39.png)
52
PRELIMINARY
Menu Feature Descriptions
M
ESSAGES
M
>
Messages
Adjust message settings, view and
manage the various types of
messages your phone can receive
and/or send:
Text Msgs
Send and manage text
messages. See
“Messages—Tex t ” on
page 85.
Create Msg
Create new text messages.
See “Sending a Text
Message” on page 91.
Voicemail
Listen to your recorded
voice messages. See
“Messages—Voicemail” on
page 83.
Browser Alerts
Read alert messages
received by your
micro-browser.
Quick Notes
Select and send pre-written
messages from the quick
notes list. See “Sending a
Quick Note Text Message”
on page 93.
Outbox
View all outgoing text
messages, delivered and
undelivered.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg3a.png)
53
PRELIMINARY
Menu Feature Descriptions
R
ING
S
TYLES
Style
M
>
Ring Styles
>
Style
Select the ring style your phone uses to notify you
of incoming calls, messages, or other events. See
“Ring Styles” on page 95.
Style Detail
M
>
Ring Styles
> Style
Detail
Change details about the current ring style. Style
represents the name of the ring style. See “Ring
Styles” on page 95.
My Tones
M
>
Ring Styles
>
My Tones
Create custom alert tones for your phone. See
“Using My Tones” on page 97.
S
HORTCUTS
M
>
Shortcuts
Create keypad or voice shortcuts to menu features.
See “Shortcuts” on page 104.
V
OICE
N
OTES
M
>
Voice Notes
Use the voice key to record messages and phone
calls. See “Voice Notes” on page 107.
Note: Recording phone calls is subject to varying
state and federal laws regarding privacy and
recording of conversations.
Drafts
Store and edit text
messages that you have
written but not sent.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg3b.png)
54
PRELIMINARY
Menu Feature Descriptions
B
ROWSER
M
>
Browser
Access Web pages and run Web-based
applications. The micro-browser
delivers WAP (Wireless Application
Protocol) pages from your service provider
directly to your phone. See “Micro-Browser” on
page 113.
C
ALCULATOR
M
>
Calculator
Use your phone as a calculator or currency
converter. See “Calculator” on page 116.
G
AMES
M
>
Games
Play games on your phone. See “Games” on
page 119.
Settings Menu
P
HONE
S
TATUS
My Tel. Number
M
>
Settings
>
Phone Status
>
My Tel. Number
View, enter, and edit information about your name
and phone number.
Active Line
M
>
Settings
>
Phone Status
>
Active Line
Change the active phone line to send and receive
calls from either of the available numbers.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg3c.png)
55
PRELIMINARY
Menu Feature Descriptions
Battery Meter
M
>
Settings
>
Phone Status
>
Battery Meter
View a detailed battery charge meter.
Other Information
M
>
Settings
>
Phone Status
>
Other Informatio
n
View your phone’s feature specifications
(if available from the service provider).
C
ONNECTION
Connect your phone to a computer or
hand-held device to send and receive data
calls on the connected device. See “Data
Calls” on page 131.
Incoming Call
M
>
Settings
>
Connection
>
Incoming Call
Specify the format for the next incoming call. You
can select
Data In Only
or
Normal
. See “Receiving
a Data Call” on page 134.
I
N-
C
ALL
S
ETUP
Set the features that are active during a call, such
as the in-call timer and call answering options.
In-Call Timer
M
>
Settings
>
In-Call Setup
>
In-Call Timer
Adjust call timer
Display
and
Beep
settings. You can
set your timer to beep at a selected interval during
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg3d.png)
56
PRELIMINARY
Menu Feature Descriptions
your calls. (60 seconds is the default.) You can also
turn on or off a display timer during calls as follows:
Answer Options
M
>
Settings
>
In-Call Setup
>
Answer Options
Turn call answering options on or off:
S
ECURITY
Phone Lock
M
>
Settings
>
Security
>
Phone Lock
Lock and unlock your phone. See “Locking and
Unlocking Your Phone” on page 139.
Lock Keypad
M
>
Settings
>
Security
>
Lock Keypad
View instructions on how to lock and unlock your
keypad. See “Locking and Unlocking Your Keypad”
on page 140.
Lock Application
M
>
Settings
>
Security
>
Lock Application
Lock and unlock specific phone applications (such
as phonebook or datebook). When an application is
locked, users must enter the unlock code to use the
application.
Time
Display the elapsed time for
the current call.
Off
No in-call timer display.
Multi-Key
Answer by pressing any key.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg3e.png)
57
PRELIMINARY
Menu Feature Descriptions
Talk Secure
M
>
Settings
>
Security
>
Talk Secure
Activate a secure connection to prevent others
from intercepting your calls. See “Talk Secure”
on page 29 and “Activating Talk Secure” on
page 141.
Restrict Calls
M
>
Settings
>
Security
>
Restrict Calls
Restrict incoming and outgoing calls. See
“Restricting Calls” on page 140.
New Passwords
M
>
Settings
>
Security
>
New Passwords
Change your unlock code (originally set to 1234) or
your security code (originally set to 000000). See
“Assigning a New Code or Password” on page 137.
O
THER
S
ETTINGS
Personalize
M
>
Settings
>
Other Settings
>
Personalize
Set several personal phone options:
Main Menu
Change the order of the
main menu. See
“Reordering Menu Items” on
page 125.
Keys
Change the functions of the
soft keys in the idle display.
See “Customizing a Soft
Key Function” on page 125.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg3f.png)
58
PRELIMINARY
Menu Feature Descriptions
Initial Setup
M
>
Settings
>
Other Settings
>
Initial Setup
Set many basic phone options:
Greeting
Change the text
displayed when
you turn on your
phone.
Quick Dial
Change quick dial
number(s).
Time and Date
Set the phone’s time and
date.
Auto PIN Dial
Some networks
require an
authenticating PIN
to allow outgoing
calls. Use this feature to
automatically dial your PIN.
Auto Redial
Use this option to
turn on or turn off
the automatic
redial feature.
When you turn on automatic
redial, your phone
automatically redials calls
that fail due to busy network
conditions. See “Using
Automatic Redial” on
page 28.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg40.png)
59
PRELIMINARY
Menu Feature Descriptions
Backlight
Set the amount of time that
the display backlight
remains on, or turn off the
backlight to conserve
battery power.
Zoom
Switch between three lines
(
Zoom Out
) and two lines
(
Zoom In
) of display text.
TTY Setup
Set your phone to
operate in one of
three TTY modes
or return to normal
Voice
mode. See “TTY
Operation” on page 126.
Scroll
Force the cursor to stop or
wrap around when it
reaches the top or bottom of
a list in the display.
Animation
Turn animation off (to
conserve battery power) or
on. Animation makes your
phone’s menus move
smoothly as you scroll up
and down.
Language
Set the language for phone
menus.
Battery Save
Adjust the phone’s power
usage characteristics to
conserve power.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg41.png)
60
PRELIMINARY
Menu Feature Descriptions
Contrast
Adjust the contrast setting
for your display.
DTMF
Your phone can send a
number to the network as
dual tone multi-frequency
(DTMF) tones. DTMF tones
are used to communicate
with automated systems
that require you to enter a
number such as a code,
password, or credit card
number. Use this option to
set DTMF tones on or off.
Master Reset
Reset all options back to
their original factory settings
except for the unlock code,
security code, and lifetime
timer.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg42.png)
61
PRELIMINARY
Menu Feature Descriptions
Network
M
>
Settings
>
Other Settings
>
Network
View and adjust your phone’s network
settings.
Your service provider registers your phone to a
network. You can view information about the current
network, change how your phone searches for a
network, and activate alerts that indicate when a
call is dropped or network registration changes.
Car Settings
M
>
Settings
>
Other Settings
>
Car Settings
Adjust hands-free car kit settings.
You can set your phone to route calls directly to the
car kit when it detects a connection, and
Master Clear
Reset all options back to
their original factory settings
except for the unlock code,
security code, and lifetime
timer, and clear all user
settings and entries.
Note: This option erases all
user-entered information
stored in your phone’s
memory, including
phonebook and datebook
entries. Once you erase the
information, it cannot be
recovered.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg43.png)
62
PRELIMINARY
Menu Feature Descriptions
automatically answer calls after two rings. See
“Hands-Free Use” on page 128.
Note: The use of wireless devices and their
accessories may be prohibited or restricted in
certain areas. Always obey the laws and
regulations on the use of these products.
Headset
M
>
Settings
>
Other Settings
>
Headset
Set your phone to automatically answer
calls after two rings when connected to a headset.
See “Hands-Free Use” on page 128.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg44.png)
63
PRELIMINARY
Recent Calls
Recent Calls
Viewing the Received Calls
or Dialed Calls List
Your phone keeps a list of the calls you recently received
and dialed, even if the calls did not connect.
Find the Feature
M
>
Recent Calls
Press To
1
S
scroll to
Received Calls
or
Dialed Calls
2
SELECT
(
+
)select the list
3
S
scroll to an entry
Note:
<
means the call
connected.
4
N
call the entry’s number
or
VIEW
(
+
) view entry details
or
M
open the
Last Calls Menu
to
perform other procedures as
described in the following list
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg45.png)
64
PRELIMINARY
Recent Calls
The
Last Calls Menu
includes the following options:
Using the Notepad
Your phone stores the most recent string of digits entered
on the keypad in a temporary memory location called the
notepad. This can be a phone number that you called, or a
number that you entered but did not call. To retrieve the
number stored in the notepad:
Option Description
Store
Create a phonebook entry with
the number in the
No.
field.
Delete
Delete the entry.
Delete All
Delete all entries in the list.
Send Message
Open a new text message with
the number in the
To
field.
Add Digits
Add digits after the number.
Attach Number
Attach a number from the
phonebook or recent call lists,
after the highlighted number.
Send Tones
Send the number to the network
as DTMF tones (for credit card or
password calls).
Find the Feature
M
>
Recent Calls
>
Notepad
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg46.png)
65
PRELIMINARY
Recent Calls
Viewing and Resetting Call
Timers
Network connection time is the elapsed time from the
moment you connect to your service provider's network to
the moment you end the call by pressing
O
. This time
includes busy signals and ringing.
The amount of network connection time you track on
your resettable timer may not equal the amount of
time for which you are billed by your service provider.
For billing information, please contact your service
provider directly.
You can view the following network connection times:
Press To
N
or
M
or
STORE
(
+
)
call the number
open the
Dialing Menu
to
attach a number or insert a
special character
create a phonebook entry
with the number in the
No.
field
Timer Description
Last Call
Time spent on the last call dialed
or received. You cannot reset this
timer.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg47.png)
66
PRELIMINARY
Recent Calls
To view a call timer:
To reset the call timer:
Dialed Calls
Total time spent on dialed calls
since the last time you reset this
timer.
Received Calls
Total time spent on calls received
since the last time you reset this
timer.
All Calls
Total time spent on dialed and
received calls since the last time
you reset this timer.
Lifetime
Total time spent on all calls on this
phone. You cannot reset this timer.
Find the Feature
M
>
Recent Calls
>
Call Times
Press To
1
S
scroll to the timer you want\
2
SELECT
(
+
)view the recorded time
Press To
1
RESET
(
+
)reset the time (if available)
2
YES
(
-
)confirm the reset
Timer Description
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg48.png)
67
PRELIMINARY
Phonebook
Phonebook
You can store a list of names and phone numbers or
email addresses in your phone’s electronic phonebook.
To see the names stored in your phonebook, press
M
>
Phonebook
from the idle display. Scroll to a name
and press
VIEW
(
+
) to view details of the phonebook entry
as shown in the following display.
Fields in a Phonebook Entry
Note: When you set a distinctive ringer alert for a
phonebook entry, the
Ringer ID
setting appears below the
speed dial number.
$*Carlo Emrys
2154337215
Speed No.15
BACK EDIT
M
Entry’s
phone
number
or
email address
Type
indicator
identifies
number type:
$
Work
U
Home
S
Main
h
Mobile
Z
Fax
p
Pager
[
Email
Voice Name
indicator
indicates a recorded
voice name Entry’s
Name
Edit
entry
Press
M
to open the
Phonebook
Menu
Return
to list
Entry’s speed
dial number
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg49.png)
68
PRELIMINARY
Phonebook
Storing a Phonebook Entry
A phone number or email address is required for a
phonebook entry. All other information is optional.
Shortcut: Enter a phone number in the idle display,
then press
STORE
(
+
) to create a phonebook entry
with the number in the
No.
field. Go directly to step 3 in the
following procedure to continue.
Enter Information
Find the Feature
M
>
Phonebook
M
>
New
Press To
1
S
scroll to
Phone Number
or
Email Address
2
SELECT
(
+
)select the entry type
3
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Name
4keypad keys enter a name for the entry
5
OK
(
+
)store the name
6
CHANGE
(
+
)select
No.
or
Email
7keypad keys enter the phone number or
email address
8
OK
(
+
)store the phone number or
email address
9
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Type
Note: This option is not
available for email entries.
10
S
scroll to the number type
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg4a.png)
69
PRELIMINARY
Phonebook
11
SELECT
(
+
)select the number type
12
RECORD
(
+
)
or
Go to step 13 if
you do not want
a voice name
record a voice name for the
entry, if desired (see page 70)
13
S
scroll to
Speed No.
The next available speed dial
number is assigned to a new
phonebook entry.
14
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Speed No.
if you want
to change it
15 keypad keys enter a different speed dial
number, if desired
16
OK
(
+
)store the speed dial number
17
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Ringer ID
if you want to
assign a distinctive ringer
alert for the phone number
Your phone uses the alert to
notify you when you receive a
call from this phone number
(see page 96).
18
S
scroll to the alert you want
19
SELECT
(
+
)store the ringer ID alert
Press To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg4b.png)
70
PRELIMINARY
Phonebook
Complete Phonebook Entry
When you are finished entering information for a
phonebook entry:
Recording a Voice Name For a
Phonebook Entry
You can record a voice name for a new or existing
phonebook entry. This lets you call the phonebook entry
using the voice dial feature (see page 72).
Tip: Make your recording in a quiet location. Hold the
phone about four inches (10 centimeters) from your mouth,
and speak directly into the phone in a normal tone of voice.
20
SELECT
(
+
)select
MORE
if you want to
create another entry with the
same
Name
Press To
DONE
(
-
)store the entry
Find the Feature
M
>
Phonebook
Do This To
1Press
S
scroll to the entry
2Press
VIEW
(
+
) view entry details
3Press
EDIT
(
+
) edit the entry
4Press
S
scroll to
Voice Name
Press To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg4c.png)
71
PRELIMINARY
Phonebook
Dialing a Phonebook Entry
You can use the phonebook list, voice dial, speed dial, or
one-touch dial to call a number (or send a text message to
an email address) stored in your phonebook. To use speed
dial, see page 31. To use one-touch dial, see page 31.
Phonebook List
To call or send email to a phonebook entry:
5Press
RECORD
(
+
)begin recording
6Press and release
the voice key and say
the entry’s name (in
two seconds)
record the voice name
7Press and release
the voice key and
repeat the name
confirm the voice name
8Press
DONE
(
-
)store the voice name
Find the Feature
M
>
Phonebook
Press To
1
S
scroll to the entry
2
N
send the call (phone number)
or open a new text message
with the address in the
To
field (email address)
Do This To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg4d.png)
72
PRELIMINARY
Phonebook
Voice Dial
To call a number or send an email using voice dial:
Editing a Phonebook Entry
Edit the entry by following the procedures described in
“Storing a Phonebook Entry” on page 68.
Deleting a Phonebook Entry
Do This To
Press and release the
voice key and say the
entry’s name (in two
seconds).
send the call (phone
number) or open a new
text message (email
address)
Find the Feature
M
>
Phonebook
Press To
1
S
scroll to the entry
2
VIEW
(
+
)view entry details
3
EDIT
(
+
) edit the entry
Find the Feature
M
>
Phonebook
Press To
1
S
scroll to the entry
2
M
open the
Phonebook Menu
3
S
scroll to
Delete
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg4e.png)
73
PRELIMINARY
Phonebook
Checking Phonebook
Capacity
You can see how much memory space is left for storing
phonebook and datebook entries on your phone.
Sorting the Phonebook List
You can sort your phonebook list by speed dial number
(the standard), name, email address, or voice dial.
Tip: The voice dial sort is identical to the name sort,
except that entries with voice name tags appear first.
4
SELECT
(
+
)select
Delete
5
YES
(
-
)confirm the deletion
Find the Feature
M
>
Phonebook
Press To
1
M
open the
Phonebook Menu
2
S
scroll to
Ph Book Capacity
3
SELECT
(
+
)select
Ph Book Capacity
Your phone displays the
phone memory meter.
Find the Feature
M
>
Phonebook
Press To
1
M
open the
Phonebook Menu
Press To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg4f.png)
74
PRELIMINARY
Phonebook
2
S
scroll to
Setup
3
SELECT
(
+
)select
Setup
4
S
scroll to
Sort by
5
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Sort by
6
S
scroll to the sort order you
want
7
SELECT
(
+
)select the sort order
Press To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg50.png)
75
PRELIMINARY
Datebook
Datebook
The datebook is a calendar that lets you schedule and
organize events such as appointments and meetings.
The datebook can also play a reminder alarm for
specific events.
Note: You must set the correct time and date in order to
use the datebook.
To schedule or review datebook events:
Week View
The datebook initially displays a calendar for the week.
Lines or filled boxes indicate scheduled events.
Find the Feature
M
>
Datebook
EXIT VIEW
{15 NOV-21 NOV }
Go to
selected day
Exit the
datebook
Untimed
event
12 hour
window One-hour event
Days of week
(press
*
or
#
to select)
Full day (12-hour)
event scheduled
S M T W T F S
Press
M
to open
the
Datebook Menu
M
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg51.png)
76
PRELIMINARY
Datebook
Day View
Select a day and press
VIEW
(
+
) to see the day’s
events. .
Event View
Select an event and press
VIEW
(
+
) to see event details.
{THU 19-NOV }
• Joe's B-day
9:00 A Marie,...
BACK VIEW
Day of week
Show event
details
Return to
previous screen
Untimed
event
Event
Alarm
Down scroll
arrow
Press
M
to open
the
Datebook Menu
M
A THU 9:00am
Marie, mtg about
new product
BACK EDIT
Day and time
Edit event
Return to
previous screen
Event details
Alarm
Down scroll
arrow
Press
M
to open
the
Datebook Menu
M
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg52.png)
77
PRELIMINARY
Datebook
Storing a Datebook Event
A title is required for a datebook event. All other
information is optional.
Changing Event Information
Find the Feature
M
>
Datebook
> day
M
>
New
Press To
1
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Title
2keypad keys enter a title for the event
3
OK
(
+
)store the event title
4
S
scroll to other fields and enter
information as necessary
You can set start time,
duration, date, repeat
interval, and reminder alarm.
5
DONE
(
-
)store the event
Find the Feature
M
>
Datebook
Press To
1
*
or
#
scroll to the day
2
VIEW
(
+
)display the day view
3
S
scroll to the event
4
VIEW
(
+
)display the event view
5
EDIT
(
+
)edit the event
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg53.png)
78
PRELIMINARY
Datebook
Copying an Event
6
S
scroll to the information you
want to change
7
CHANGE
(
+
)edit the information
8keypad keys enter new information
9
DONE
(
-
)store the information
Find the Feature
M
>
Datebook
Press To
1
*
or
#
scroll to the day
2
VIEW
(
+
)display the day view
3
S
scroll to the event
4
M
open the
Datebook Menu
5
S
scroll to
Copy
6
SELECT
(
+
)copy the event
7
YES
(
-
)confirm the copy
Your phone assumes you
want to change the date, and
displays the
Date
field.
8keypad keys enter date information
9
}
(
+
)move to month, day, and year
10
DONE
(
-
)save the copy of the event
11
DONE
(
-
)return to the day view
Press To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg54.png)
79
PRELIMINARY
Datebook
Deleting an Event
Find the Feature
M
>
Datebook
Press To
1
*
or
#
scroll to the day
2
VIEW
(
+
)display the day view
3
S
scroll to the event
4
M
open the
Datebook Menu
5
S
scroll to
Delete
6
SELECT
(
+
)select
Delete
7
YES
(
-
)confirm the deletion
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg55.png)
80
PRELIMINARY
Radio
Radio
You can use your phone to listen to FM radio
stations when the optional Motorola Original™
FM Stereo Radio Headset accessory is
plugged into the phone’s accessory connector
port.
Turning the Radio On and Off
Alternatively, you can use the following procedure:
Note: The
Radio
menu feature and soft key options appear
only when the FM Stereo Radio Headset is plugged into
the accessory connector port.
Press To
Radio
(
+
)turn the radio on and off
Press To
1
M
open the menu
2
S
scroll to
Radio
3
On
(
+
) or
Off
(
+
)
turn the radio on or off
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg56.png)
81
PRELIMINARY
Radio
Tuning a Station
Storing a Preset
Selecting a Preset
Sending and Receiving Calls
With the Radio On
Your phone rings or vibrates as usual to notify you of an
incoming call, message, or other event.
Do This To
Press
S
or
Press and hold
S
scroll to the next frequency
scroll to the next available
stereo station
Do This To
Press and hold a
number key
(
1
to
9
)
assign its preset number to
the tuned station
Press To
a number key
(
1
to
9
)
tune the station stored at the
preset location
Do This To
Press
IGNORE
(
-
)ignore the call
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg57.png)
82
PRELIMINARY
Radio
To end the call and resume the FM broadcast:
Turn the radio off before dialing outgoing calls from the
phone keypad. You do not have to turn off the radio to dial
emergency numbers, or numbers selected from your
phonebook or recent call lists.
Tip: To dial a recently called number, press
N
or the
button on the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone to go
to the dialed calls list (see page 63).
Press
ANSWER
(
+
)
or
Press the button on the
FM Stereo Radio
Headset microphone
answer the call
Note: You can use the
FM Stereo Radio
Headset microphone to
converse with the other
party during a call
Do This To
Press
O
or
Press and hold the
button on the FM Stereo
Radio Headset
microphone
end the call
Do This To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg58.png)
83
PRELIMINARY
Messages—Voicemail
Messages—Voicemail
You can listen to your voicemail messages
by calling your network voicemail phone
number. Voicemail messages are stored on
the network—not on your phone.
Storing Your Voicemail Number
Storing your voicemail number on your phone makes it
easy for you to listen to new voicemail messages. In many
cases, your service provider has already done this for you.
Your service provider additionally may store your voicemail
number as phonebook entry number 1, so you can use
one-touch dial to listen to your voicemail messages. If
necessary, see “Storing a Phonebook Entry” on page 68 to
store your voicemail number for one-touch dial access.
Find the Feature
M
>
Messages
M
>
VoiceMail Setup
Press To
1keypad keys enter your voicemail number
2
OK
(
+
)store the number
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg59.png)
84
PRELIMINARY
Messages—Voicemail
Receiving a Voicemail Message
When you receive a voicemail message, your phone
displays the
&
(voice message waiting) indicator and
a
New VoiceMail
notification.
If reminders are turned on, your phone sends a reminder
at regular intervals until you close the new message
notification, listen to the message, or turn off your phone.
Listening to a Voicemail
Message
The phone calls your voicemail number. If no voicemail
number is stored, your phone prompts you to store one.
Shortcut: If your voicemail number is also stored as
phonebook entry number 1, you can press and hold
1
to
listen to your voicemail message(s).
Do This To
Press
CALL
(
+
)listen to the message
Find the Feature
M
>
Messages
>
VoiceMail
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg5a.png)
85
PRELIMINARY
Messages—Text
Messages—Text
Text messages are brief messages that you
can send and receive.
Quick notes are pre-written text messages that
you can customize and send quickly.
Your text message inbox must be set up before you can
send and receive messages. The number of messages the
inbox can hold depends on the length of the messages,
and the number of other messages and drafts stored on
your phone.
Setting Up the Text Message
Inbox
Note: In many cases, your service provider has already
set up the text message inbox for you.
Find the Feature
M
>
Messages
M
>
Text Msg Setup
Press To
1
CHANGE
(
+
)change the
Srvce Center No.
2keypad keys enter the phone number for
the service that handles your
outgoing messages
3
OK
(
+
)store the number
4
CHANGE
(
+
)change the
Expire After
period
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg5b.png)
86
PRELIMINARY
Messages—Text
Receiving a Text Message
Note: Your text message inbox must be set up before you
can receive text messages (see page 85).
5keypad keys enter the expiration period—
the number of days your
network tries to send
unreceived messages
6
OK
(
+
)store the expiration period
7
CHANGE
(
+
)change the
Cleanup
setting
8
S
scroll to the number of days
you want to keep messages
in the inbox, or the number of
messages you want to keep
9
SELECT
(
+
)select the cleanup setting
10
CHANGE
(
+
)change the
SMS Alert
setting
11
S
select whether you want
incoming message alerts
turned
On
or
Off
while you are
on a voice call
12
SELECT
(
+
)select the
SMS Alert
setting
13
DONE
(
-
)save the inbox settings
Press To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg5c.png)
87
PRELIMINARY
Messages—Text
When you receive a text message, your phone displays the
X
(message waiting) indicator and a
New Message
notification.
If reminders are turned on, your phone sends a reminder
at regular intervals until you close the new message
notification, read the message, or turn off your phone.
When your phone displays
Memory is Full!
, you must
delete some existing messages to receive new messages.
Reading, Locking, or Deleting a
Text Message
Messages in the text message inbox are sorted from
newest to oldest. The oldest messages are deleted
automatically as specified by the inbox cleanup setting
(see page 85). If you want to save a message, you should
lock it to prevent it from being deleted during cleanup.
Press To
READ
(
+
)open the message
Find the Feature
M
>
Messages
>
Text Msgs
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg5d.png)
88
PRELIMINARY
Messages—Text
The
Text Msg Menu
includes the following options:
Press To
1
S
scroll to the message
The following indicators show
message status:
Y
= unread
d
= unread and urgent
n
= read
f
= read and locked
2
READ
(
+
)open the message
3
SAVE
(
-
)
or
REPLY
(
+
)
or
M
close the message
compose and send a reply
open the
Text Msg Menu
to
perform other procedures as
described in the following list
Option Description
Delete
Delete the message.
Create Message
Open a new text message.
Call Back
Call the number in the message
header or embedded in the
message.
Reply
Open a new text message with
the sender’s
Reply To
number or
email address in the
To
field.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg5e.png)
89
PRELIMINARY
Messages—Text
Storing Sounds From a Text
Message
You can receive a text message with inserted sounds
(such as music or alert tones). You can store these sounds
on your phone.
Select a Sound File
Forward
Open a copy of the text message
with an empty
To
field.
Lock/Unlock
Lock or unlock the message.
Store Number
Create a phonebook entry with
the embedded number in the
No.
field.
Delete All
Delete all inbox messages.
Store Address
Create a phonebook entry with
the embedded email address in
the
Email
field..
Setup
Open the text message inbox
setup menu.
Press To
1
S
scroll to and highlight the
inserted sound file
2
M
open the
Text Msg Menu
3
S
scroll to
Store
4
SELECT
(
+
)display a list of message
items that can be stored
Option Description
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg5f.png)
90
PRELIMINARY
Messages—Text
Store a Sound File
To store the sound file:
To set the sound as an alert tone for a specific event:
5
S
scroll to
File Attachment
6
SELECT
(
+
)display the sound file
Press To
1
STORE
(
+
)view storage options
2
S
scroll to
Store Only
3
SELECT
(
+
)store the sound to your
My Tones
list (see page 97)
Press To
1
STORE
(
+
)view storage options
2
S
scroll to
Set As Ring Tone
3
SELECT
(
+
)set the sound as an alert
Your phone displays
Set As Which?
, and lists the
available event types
4
S
scroll to the eventt
5
SELECT
(
+
)store the sound and set it as
the event alert
Press To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg60.png)
91
PRELIMINARY
Messages—Text
Sending a Text Message
You can send a text message to one or more
recipients. You can manually enter each recipient’s
phone number or email address, or select numbers/
addresses from the phonebook or recent call lists.
Note: When you manually enter numbers and/or email
addresses, you must insert a space between each entry.
Press
1
one time, wait for the space to appear, then
enter the next number or email address.
Find the Feature
M
>
Messages
>
Create Message
Press To
1
CHANGE
(
+
)select
To
2keypad keys
or
BROWSE
(
+
)
enter one or more phone
numbers and/or email
addresses
Tip: Press
1
to insert a
space between each
number/address that you
enter manually.
select numbers/addresses
from the phonebook or recent
call lists
3
OK
(
+
)store the numbers/addresses
4
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Msg
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg61.png)
92
PRELIMINARY
Messages—Text
5keypad keys enter the message
Note: Message length is
limited.A counter at the top of
the display shows how many
characters are left.
6
OK
(
+
)store the message
7
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Priority
8
S
scroll to the priority you want
9
SELECT
(
+
)set the priority
10
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Call
11 keypad keys enter a number for the
recipient to call back
12
OK
(
+
)store the number
13
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Receipt
14
S
select whether you want the
message status to be
updated when the recipient
opens the message
Note: Sent messages are
stored in your outbox. See
page 94.
15
OK
(
+
)store your receipt preference
16
DONE
(
-
)finish the message
Press To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg62.png)
93
PRELIMINARY
Messages—Text
Sending a Quick Note Text
Message
Quick notes are pre-written messages that you can edit
and send quickly (for example,
Meet me at ...
). You can
also create and store new quick notes.
The
Quick Note Menu
includes the following options:
17
YES
(
-
)
or
NO
(
+
)
send the message
cancel the message or save it
in the drafts folder
Find the Feature
M
>
Messages
>
Quick Notes
Press To
1
S
scroll to the quick note
2
READ
(
+
)
or
M
read the quick note
open the
Quick Note Menu
to
perform other procedures as
described in the following list
Option Description
New
Create a new quick note.
Edit
Edit the quick note.
Press To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg63.png)
94
PRELIMINARY
Messages—Text
Viewing the Status of Sent
Text Messages
Messages that you send are stored in the outbox.
Messages in the outbox are sorted from newest to oldest.
The following indicators show message status:
Delete
Delete the quick note.
Send
Open a new message with the
quick note in the
Msg
field.
Find the Feature
M
>
Messages
>
Outbox
á
= sending in progress
Y
= delivered
m
= sending failed
n
= read by recipient
Option Description
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg64.png)
95
PRELIMINARY
Ring Styles
Ring Styles
Your phone rings or vibrates to notify you of an
incoming call or other event. This ring or vibration is
called an alert. You can select one of five different ring
styles:
The ring style indicator in the display shows the current
ring style (see page 23).
Each ring style contains settings for specific event alerts,
ringer ID, and ringer and keypad volume.
Selecting a Ring Style
w
= loud ring
x
= soft ring
y
= vibrate
u
= ring and vibrate
t
= silent
Find the Feature
M
>
Ring Styles
>
Style
Press To
1
S
scroll to the ring style
2
SELECT
(
+
)select the ring style
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg65.png)
96
PRELIMINARY
Ring Styles
Customizing a Ring Style
Change Style Settings
You can change the alerts that notify you of the
following events: incoming calls, text messages,
voicemail messages, data calls, fax calls, alarms, and
reminders. Any changes you make are saved to the
current ring style.
Note: Style represents the current ring style.
Activate and Deactivate Ringer IDs
When ringer IDs are turned on, your phone uses
distinctive ringer alerts to notify you of incoming calls or
messages from specific entries stored in your phonebook.
To assign a ringer ID to a phonebook entry, see page 68.
Find the Feature
M
>
Ring Styles
> Style
Detail
Press To
1
S
scroll to the event
2
CHANGE
(
+
)select the event
3
S
scroll to the alert you want
4
SELECT
(
+
)select the alert
Find the Feature
M
>
Ring Styles
> Style
Detail
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg66.png)
97
PRELIMINARY
Ring Styles
Note: Style represents the current ring style.
Set Ringer or Keypad Volume
Note: Style represents the current ring style.
Using My Tones
You can create and store up to 32 custom alert tones on
your phone. The tones appear in the list of available alerts.
Create a Tone
Press To
1
S
scroll to
Ringer IDs
2
CHANGE
(
+
)change the ringer IDs setting
3
S
scroll to
On
or
Off
4
SELECT
(
+
)select the option
Find the Feature
M
>
Ring Styles
> Style
Detail
Press To
1
S
scroll to
Ring Volume
or
Key Volume
2
*
or
#
scroll to the desired volume
3
OK
(
+
)confirm the new volume
Find the Feature
M
>
Ring Styles
>
My Tones
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg67.png)
98
PRELIMINARY
Ring Styles
Enter Notes
Use the keypad keys to enter each note. Press a key
multiple times to cycle through its notes or options (pitch,
octave, or length). The default setting for a new tone is a
quarter note in octave two.
Press To
1
S
scroll to
[New Tone]
2
SELECT
(
+
)select
[New Tone]
3
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Notes
4keypad keys enter notes (see page 98)
5
OK
(
+
)store the notes
6
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Name
7keypad keys enter a name for the tone
8
OK
(
+
)store the name
9
DONE
(
-
)store the tone
Key Phone Display Description
1
1
set octave one
2
set octave two
3
set octave three
2
A
note A
B
note B
C
note C
3
D
note D
E
note E
F
note F
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg68.png)
99
PRELIMINARY
Ring Styles
Enter a note as follows:
4
G
note G
R
rest
7
#
sharp
b
flat
0
q
quarter note or rest
h
half note or rest
w
whole note or rest
Task Action
Change the
octave
Set the new octave (
1
,
2
, or
3
)
before selecting the note. The
octave applies to all following
notes until you change it again.
Select the note
(required)
Press a keypad key.
Change a note
to a sharp or
flat
Enter a sharp or flat (
#
or
b
) after
selecting the note.
Some sharps and flats are played
as standard notes. For example,
B#
is the same as
C
. Press
S
to
scroll to valid notes when entering
a new note.
Change a
note’s length
Set the new length (
q
,
h
, or
w
)
after selecting the note. The
length applies to all following
notes until you change it again.
Key Phone Display Description
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg69.png)
100
PRELIMINARY
Ring Styles
Example
Press the following keys to play this sequence of notes and
rests in octave three: C (quarter note), E flat (quarter
note), half rest, and G (whole note):
Add a rest Enter one or more rests (
R
characters) as needed in the tone
sequence. Set the length of the
rest by entering a
q
,
h
, or
w
character after the rest, just as
you would for a note.
Listen to a new
tone as you
compose it
Press
M
to enter the
Compose Menu
, and select
Play All
to play the notes you
have entered.
Press To Phone
Display
1
1
1
1
set octave
three
3
2
2
2
2
enter a
quarter note
C
C
3
3
3
7
7
enter a
quarter note
E flat
Eb
4
4
4
0
0
enter a half
rest
Rh
Task Action
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg6a.png)
101
PRELIMINARY
Ring Styles
Play a Tone
Edit a Tone
You cannot edit the predefined alert tones included with
your phone. To edit a custom alert tone:
5
4
0
0
0
enter a whole
note G
Gw
Find the Feature
M
>
Ring Styles
>
My Tones
Press To
1
S
scroll to the tone
2
M
open the
My Tones Menu
3
S
scroll to
Play
4
SELECT
(
+
) select
Play
5
PLAY
(
+
)
or
CANCEL
(
-
)
play the tone again
return to my tones list
Find the Feature
M
>
Ring Styles
>
My Tones
Press To
1
S
scroll to the tone
2
EDIT
(
+
)open the tone details
Press To Phone
Display
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg6b.png)
102
PRELIMINARY
Ring Styles
Delete a Tone
You cannot delete the predefined alert tones included with
your phone. To delete a custom alert tone:
Download a Tone
You can download custom alert tones from the
micro-browser application, or from a text message. To
download tones from the micro-browser, see page 114. To
download tones from a text message, see page 89.
3
S
scroll to the item you want to
edit (
Name
or
Notes
)
4
CHANGE
(
+
)select the item
5keypad keys enter new text or notes
6
OK
(
+
)store the tone
Find the Feature
M
>
Ring Styles
>
My Tones
Press To
1
S
scroll to the tone
2
M
open the
My Tones Menu
3
S
scroll to
Delete
4
SELECT
(
+
)select
Delete
5
YES
(
-
)confirm the deletion
Press To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg6c.png)
103
PRELIMINARY
Ring Styles
Setting Reminders
A reminder is an alert that rings or vibrates at regular
intervals to notify you about a voicemail or text message
that you have received, or a datebook event that you
have scheduled.
Note: Style represents the current ring style.
Find the Feature
M
>
Ring Styles
> Style
Detail
>
Reminders
Press To
1
S
scroll to
Beep
or
Vibrate
to set
the reminder alert type, or
Off
to turn off all reminders
2
SELECT
(
+
)select the reminder alert
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg6d.png)
104
PRELIMINARY
Shortcuts
Shortcuts
Your phone includes several standard shortcuts. You
can create additional shortcuts to frequently used
menu items.
Standard Shortcuts
The following shortcuts are pre-programmed in your
phone. You cannot edit or delete these shortcuts.
Creating a Shortcut
You can create a keypad shortcut plus an optional voice
shortcut to a menu item. A voice shortcut takes you
directly to the menu item when you say the shortcut name.
Tip: Make your recording in a quiet location. Hold the
phone about four inches (10 centimeters) from your mouth,
and speak directly into the phone in a normal tone of voice.
Do This To
Press
M
, then
press and hold
M
(within two seconds)
zoom in/out on your phone
display
Press
M
*
lock/unlock your keypad
Press
M
#
display your phone number
Press
N
go to the dialed calls list
Press
O
exit the menu system
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg6e.png)
105
PRELIMINARY
Shortcuts
Do This To
1Press
M
enter the menu system
2Press
S
scroll to the menu item
3Press and hold
M
open the shortcut editor
4Press
YES
(
-
)view shortcut options
5Press
CHANGE
(
+
)
or
Press
DONE
(
-
)
or
Press
S
change the keypad
shortcut number
select the default keypad
shortcut number
scroll to
Voice
to assign a
voice shortcut
6Press
RECORD
(
+
)begin recording
The phone displays
Press Voice Key then
say voice shortcut
.
7Press and release
the voice key and say
the shortcut’s name
(in two seconds)
record the shortcut name
8Press and release
the voice key and
repeat the name
confirm the shortcut
name
9Press
DONE
(
-
)store the shortcut name
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg6f.png)
106
PRELIMINARY
Shortcuts
Using Shortcuts
Use a Keypad Shortcut
Select a Shortcut From the List
Use a Voice Shortcut
Press To
1
M
open the menu
2the keypad shortcut
number
go to the menu item or
perform the menu action
Find the Feature
M
>
Shortcuts
> the shortcut you
want
Do This To
1Press
M
open the menu
2Press and release
the voice key and say
the shortcut’s name
(in two seconds)
go to the menu item or
perform the menu action
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg70.png)
107
PRELIMINARY
Voice Notes
Voice Notes
You can use the voice note feature to record personal
messages and phone calls on your phone.
Recording a Voice Note
Use this procedure to record a voice note from the idle
display, or to record a phone call in progress. Your phone
plays an alert tone to notify the other party that the call is
being recorded.
Note: Recording phone calls is subject to varying state
and federal laws regarding privacy and recording of
conversations.
Tip: Make your recording in a quiet location. Hold the
phone about four inches (10 centimeters) from your mouth,
and speak directly into the phone in a normal tone of voice.
Do This Result
1Press and hold the
voice key.
The phone sounds an
alert tone and begins
recording.
2Speak your voice note
while continuing to hold
the voice key.
The phone records the
voice note.
3Release the voice key
to stop recording.
The phone displays the
voice note number and
total recording time.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg71.png)
108
PRELIMINARY
Voice Notes
Viewing the Voice Notes List
Find the Feature
M
>
Voice Notes
Voice Notes
2)2:20pm 6/1/00
1)4:05am 4/1/00
EXIT PLAY
f
Press
M
to open the
Voice Notes Menu
Play the
highlighted
voice note
Return to
previous screen
Time/date
recorded
Down scroll
arrow
Locked
voice note
M
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg72.png)
109
PRELIMINARY
Voice Notes
Playing a Voice Note
When you connect an optional Motorola Original™
headset or FM Stereo Radio Headset accessory to your
phone, playback is automatically routed to the headset.
Tip: You can play a voice note while taking a call. It will not
be transmitted to the other party.
Playback Screen
The playback screen is displayed while the voice note
plays.
Find the Feature
M
>
Voice Notes
Press To
1
S
scroll to the voice note
2
PLAY
(
+
)play the voice note
Erase
voice note
Return to
previous
screen
Voice note
number
Press
#
to
fast forward
Press
*
to rewind
Voice Note 3
{}
SAVE DELETE
Indicates
% played
Press
M
to open the
Voice Notes Menu
M
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg73.png)
110
PRELIMINARY
Voice Notes
Voice Note Controls
Stop
playback and
return to voice
notes list.
Stop
playback and
go to
Voice
Notes Menu
.
Stop
playback and
scroll up/down
to next voice
note.
Rewind three
seconds,
resume
playing.
Press and hold
to rewind to the
beginning.
When playback is
complete, press to
restart.
Fast forward
three
seconds,
resume
playing.
Press any
number to
alternately
stop and
start
playback.
If voice note is
locked, stop
playback and
unlock voice
note.
Press and
hold to fast
forward to
end.
If voice note is
unlocked, stop
playback and
display
Delete
Voice Note?
Raise or lower
playback
volume of
voice note.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg74.png)
111
PRELIMINARY
Voice Notes
Locking and Unlocking a Voice
Note
Lock a voice note to prevent it from being deleted. You
must unlock a voice note to delete it.
To lock or unlock a voice note during playback:
Playback stops when you lock or unlock a voice note.
Press any number key to resume playback.
Find the Feature
M
>
Voice Notes
Press To
1
S
scroll to the voice note
2
M
open the
Voice Notes Menu
3
S
scroll to
Lock
or
Unlock
4
SELECT
(
+
)lock or unlock the voice note
Press To
1
M
open the
Voice Notes Menu
2
S
scroll to
Lock
or
Unlock
3
SELECT
(
+
)lock or unlock the voice note
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg75.png)
112
PRELIMINARY
Voice Notes
Deleting a Voice Note
Notes:
•Press
NO
(
+
) to cancel deletion.
•You cannot delete a locked voice note.
•You cannot recover a deleted voice note.
Find the Feature
M
>
Voice Notes
Press To
1
S
scroll to the voice note you
want to delete
2
M
open the
Voice Notes Menu
3
S
scroll to
Delete
or
Delete All
4
SELECT
(
+
)select the highlighted option
5
YES
(
-
) confirm the deletion
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg76.png)
113
PRELIMINARY
Micro-Browser
Micro-Browser
The micro-browser lets you access Web
pages and Web-based applications on your
phone. Contact your service provider to set
up access, if necessary.
Starting a Micro-Browser
Session
If you are unable to establish a network connection with
the micro-browser, contact your service provider.
Find the Feature
M
>
Browser
Press To
1
S
scroll to a bookmark, service,
or application
2
SELECT
(
+
)select the item
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg77.png)
114
PRELIMINARY
Micro-Browser
Interacting With Web Pages
Downloading a Sound File
You can use the micro-browser to download sound files
onto your phone.
To download a sound file from a Web page, select its link.
The sound begins to play when downloading is complete.
Store the Sound File
Press To
S
scroll through text, or
highlight a selectable item
SELECT
(
+
)select the highlighted item
N
call the highlighted phone
number from the
micro-browser
keypad keys,
followed by
OK
(
+
)
enter information
Press
*
to delete one letter
at a time if you make a
mistake.
*
go back to the previous page
M
open the
Browser Menu
Press To
1
STORE
(
+
)view storage options
2
S
scroll to
Store Only
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg78.png)
115
PRELIMINARY
Micro-Browser
Set the Sound File As An Alert
You can use the sound as an alert tone to notify you of an
incoming call or other event.
For more information about using sounds and alert tones,
see page 97.
3
SELECT
(
+
)store the sound
Your phone adds the sound
to the
My Tones
list.
Press To
1
STORE
(
+
)view storage options
2
S
scroll to
Set As Ring Tone
3
SELECT
(
+
)set the sound as an alert
4
S
scroll to the event
5
SELECT
(
+
)store the sound and set it as
the event alert
The event alert setting is
saved to the current ring style
Press To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg79.png)
116
PRELIMINARY
Calculator
Calculator
You can use your phone as a calculator and currency
converter.
Calculating Numbers
Press To
1number keys enter a number
2
*
or
#
highlight a calculator function
3
SELECT
(
+
)perform the function
Calculator
+0
EXIT SELECT
Selected
function
appears
here
Perform the
highlighted
function
Press
M
to open
the
Calculator Menu
Exit the
calculator
Entered
number
Press
*
or
#
to scroll
to other
functions
Press
*
or
#
to highlight
a function
.÷
C=+-x}
M
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg7a.png)
117
PRELIMINARY
Calculator
The calculator can perform the following functions:
Function Description
.
Insert a decimal point
C
Clear the calculation
CE
Clear entry (replaces
C
when you enter
subsequent values in a calculation)
=
Calculate the result
+
Add
-
Subtract
x
Multiply
÷
Divide
%
Divide the displayed value by 100
±
Change the entry’s sign
(positive/negative)
$
Calculate the exchange rate
MS
Store the value in memory (overwrites
current stored value)
MC
Clear the value stored in memory
MR
Replace the displayed value with the
value stored in memory
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg7b.png)
118
PRELIMINARY
Calculator
Converting Currency
The currency converter works just like the calculator,
but uses the
$
(currency) function:
Find the Feature
M
>
Calculator
M
>
Exchange Rate
Press To
1number keys enter the exchange rate
2
OK
(
+
)store the exchange rate
3number keys enter the amount to convert
(amount to multiply by the
exchange rate)
4
*
or
#
highlight the
$
function
5
SELECT
(
+
)perform the conversion
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg7c.png)
119
PRELIMINARY
Games
Games
You can play games with your phone between phone
calls. An incoming call, message, alarm, or alert
automatically ends the game.
Playing a Game
When the game is over:
Game Options
Press
M
to select the following options during a game:
Find the Feature
M
>
Games
Press To
1
S
scroll to a game
2
SELECT
(
+
)start the game
Press To
NEW
(
+
) or
YES
(
+
)
start another session of the
same game
BACK
(
-
) or
NO
(
-
)
end the game session
Option Description
Game Sounds
Switch game sounds on/off.
New Game
Start a new game session.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg7d.png)
120
PRELIMINARY
Games
Blackjack
In this classic card game, you play against the dealer to
see who can get closer to 21 points without going over.
Rules of the Game
•You start a new game with 100 credits. You must bet
from 1-10 credits for each hand you play.
•Press
DEAL
(
+
) to start a new hand.
•The first card is dealt to the dealer. The dealer’s cards
are shown at the top of the display, and your cards are
shown at the bottom.
•Face cards count as 10 points. Number cards count
as the points shown on their face.
•An ace counts as 11 points, unless that would put you
over 21 points. Otherwise, an ace is counted as 1
point. An ace that is originally counted as 11 may later
be counted as 1 if it will bring your total under or equal
to 21 points.
•An initial deal of an ace and a card with a face value of
10 points counts as exactly 21 points or Blackjack.
•Blackjack automatically wins against any other hand
that totals 21 points.
Key Configuration
Assign game functions to
different keypad keys.
Help
Review the goal of the game.
Option Description
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg7e.png)
121
PRELIMINARY
Games
•If you score more than 21 points, you go “bust” or
lose.
•If you get five cards without going bust, you win.
•If you and the dealer have the same score, the
dealer wins.
•You can ask for a “hit” or another card as long as you
do not go bust.
•As long as the dealer’s total is less than 17 points, the
dealer must continue to take a hit.
How to Play
When the game begins, you are dealt two cards.
Press
M
to select the following options:
Press To
STAY
(
-
)see the results of the hand
HIT ME
(
+
)request another card
Option Description
Insurance
If the dealer’s first card is an
ace, pay half of your wager to
insure against the dealer
winning with Blackjack.
Double Down
Double your initial wager after
receiving your first two cards.
Choose Deck
Choose the deck image.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg7f.png)
122
PRELIMINARY
Games
Falling Numbers
Score points by pressing the corresponding number
key for numbers as they “fall” down the display.
Rules of the Game
•If a number reaches the bottom of the display or if you
press an incorrect number key, you score one miss.
•The game is over when you score three misses.
•The game has five levels. When you complete a level,
play continues automatically at the next level.
•You earn a bonus if you finish a level without a miss.
How to Play
When the game begins, numbers start falling from the
upper portion of the display. Press the corresponding
number key to eliminate a falling number before it reaches
the bottom of the display.
Press
M
to set the following options:
Video Poker
Turn 100 credits into 9,999+ credits by making the best
possible poker hands.
Option Description
Level
Choose the starting level of play.
Top Scores
View the top five scores.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg80.png)
123
PRELIMINARY
Games
Rules of the Game
•You start a new game with 100 credits. You must bet
from 1-10 credits for each hand you play.
•You are dealt five cards face up, and have one
opportunity to trade in cards (zero to five) for new
ones.
•A winning hand earns credits as listed in the
Awards Table
.
•Your credit total is saved when you exit the game. The
next time you play, you start with the number of credits
that remain from the previous session.
•The game is over when you lose all of your credits.
How to Play
Place your initial bet or change your bet (from 1-10 credits)
and then:
Press To
DEAL
(
+
)start a new hand
4
select the card to the left
6
select the card to the right
5
or
DISCARD
(
-
)discard (cannot be undone)
DONE
(
+
)remove discarded cards and
deal replacements
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg81.png)
124
PRELIMINARY
Games
Press
M
to select the following options:
Option Description
Change Bet
Change the amount of your bet.
Choose Deck
Choose the deck image.
Awards Table
View the list of odds/payouts for
each winning hand.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg82.png)
125
PRELIMINARY
Adjusting Your Settings
Adjusting Your
Settings
Reordering Menu Items
You can reorder the items in your phone’s main menu.
Customizing a Soft Key
Function
You can relabel the soft keys (
-
and
+
) to access
different menu items from the idle display.
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Other Settings
>
Personalize
>
Main Menu
Press To
1
S
scroll to a menu item
2
GRAB
(
+
)grab the menu item
3
S
move the item to a new
location in the menu
4
INSERT
(
+
)insert the menu item
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Other Settings
>
Personalize
>
Keys
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg83.png)
126
PRELIMINARY
Adjusting Your Settings
TTY Operation
You can use an optional TTY device with your
phone to send and receive calls. You must plug the
TTY device into the phone’s headset jack and set
the phone to operate in one of three TTY modes.
Set TTY Mode
When you set your phone to a TTY mode, it operates in
that mode whenever the TTY device is connected.
Press To
1
S
scroll to
Left
or
Right
2
CHANGE
(
+
)open the key editor
3
S
scroll to the new key function
4
CHANGE
(
+
)confirm the new function
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Other Settings
>
Initial Setup
>
TTY Setup
Press To
1
S
scroll to
TTY Setup
2
CHANGE
(
+
)change the TTY mode
3
S
scroll to the TTY mode
4
SELECT
(
+
)select the TTY mode
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg84.png)
127
PRELIMINARY
Adjusting Your Settings
The
TTY Setup
menu includes the following options:
When your phone is in a TTY mode, the international TTY
symbol and the mode setting are shown in the idle display.
You can press
TTYMODE
(
-
) to change the mode setting.
Switch to TTY Mode During a Voice Call
Return to Voice Mode
To return to normal voice mode, select
Voice
from the
TTY Setup
menu as described on page 126.
Option Description
TTY
Transmit and receive TTY characters
VCO
Receive TTY characters but transmit
by speaking into the microphone
HCO
Transmit TTY characters but receive by
listening to the earpiece
Voice
Return to normal voice mode
Press To
1
M
open the
Call
menu
2
S
scroll to
TTY Setup
3
SELECT
(
+
)display the
TTY Setup
menu
4
S
scroll to the TTY mode
5
SELECT
(
+
)select the TTY mode
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg85.png)
128
PRELIMINARY
Adjusting Your Settings
Hands-Free Use
You can purchase an optional Motorola
Original™ hands-free car kit or headset for
your phone. These accessories provide
alternative ways for you to use your phone
without using your hands.
Note: The use of wireless devices and their accessories
may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. Always
obey the laws and regulations on the use of these
products.
Automatic Answer
You can set your phone to automatically answer calls after
two rings when connected to a car kit or headset.
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Other Settings
Press To
1
S
scroll to
Car Settings
or
Headset
2
SELECT
(
+
)select the feature
3
S
scroll to
Auto Answer
4
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Auto Answer
5
S
scroll to
On
or
Off
6
SELECT
(
+
)confirm the setting
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg86.png)
129
PRELIMINARY
Adjusting Your Settings
Automatic Hands-Free
You can set your phone to automatically route calls to a car
kit when it detects a connection.
Power-Off Delay
When your phone is connected to a car kit, you can set it
to stay on for a specified time period after you switch off
the ignition. This prevents the phone from draining your
vehicle battery, but leaves the phone on long enough that
you do not have to re-enter your unlock code when making
short stops.
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Other Settings
>
Car Settings
>
Auto Handsfree
Press To
1
S
scroll to
On
or
Off
2
SELECT
(
+
)confirm the setting
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Other Settings
>
Car Settings
>
Power-Off Delay
Press To
1
S
scroll to the time delay
2
SELECT
(
+
)confirm your selection
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg87.png)
130
PRELIMINARY
Adjusting Your Settings
Caution: If you select
Continuous
, the phone does not
power off when you turn off the ignition. Be careful not to
drain your vehicle battery if you select this option.
Charger Time
When your phone is connected to a car kit, you can set
it to charge itself for a specified time period after you
switch off the ignition. This helps ensure that the phone
battery gets fully charged while the vehicle is parked.
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Other Settings
>
Car Settings
>
Charger Time
Press To
1
S
scroll to the charge time
2
SELECT
(
+
)confirm your selection
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg88.png)
131
PRELIMINARY
Data Calls
Data Calls
A Motorola Original™ data kit lets you transfer
data between your phone and a computer or
other external device. You can:
•use your phone as a modem to connect to the
Internet.
•use your phone to send and receive data calls on your
computer or hand-held device.
Connecting Your Phone to an
External Device
Connect your phone to a computer or hand-held device
using a serial cable or a USB cable.
Note: Not all devices are compatible with serial cable or
USB cable connections. Check your external device for
specifications.
Set Up a Cable Connection
Attach a serial cable or Motorola Original USB cable to the
phone and external device as follows. Your phone plays a
short tone when the cable connects.
Note: Check your computer or hand-held device to
determine the type of cable you need.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg89.png)
132
PRELIMINARY
Data Calls
Attaching a Serial Cable
Use the interchangeable head on the Motorola
Multi-Connect Serial Cable to connect a computer,
Palm III device, or Palm V device to your phone.
Do This
1Plug the serial
cable into the
detachable head.
Make sure that the
Motorola logo on
the detachable
head and the
metal shielding on
the serial cable
plug are both
facing you.
2With the Motorola
logo and the
phone both facing
you, plug the
detachable head
into the phone’s
accessory
connector port.
3Plug the other end of the cable into the serial
interface connection on the external device and
tighten the screws.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg8a.png)
133
PRELIMINARY
Data Calls
Attaching a USB Cable
Install the Software
Install the software from the CD-ROM that comes with
your Motorola Original data kit. See the data kit’s user
guide for more information.
Sending a Data Call
You can connect your phone to a computer or hand-held
device to send data from the connected device.
Use this feature to transfer data from your computer onto
another device, and to synchronize phonebook and
datebook information between your phone, computer, and/
or hand-held device.
Do This
4Plug the end of the
cable with the
Motorola logo into the
phone’s accessory
connector port. Make
sure that the logo and
the phone are both
facing you.
5Plug the other end—the USB connection—into
the USB port on the external device.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg8b.png)
134
PRELIMINARY
Data Calls
Connect your phone as described on page 131 and do the
following:
Receiving a Data Call
You can connect your phone to a computer or hand-held
device to receive data.
Use this feature to transfer data to your computer from
another device.
Do This To
1Check the phone make sure that the phone is
connected and powered on
2Open the
application on
your computer
place the call through the
application (such as
dial-up-networking)
Note: You cannot dial data
numbers through your
phone’s keypad. You must
dial them through your
computer.
3End the call from
the connected
device
close the call and connection
when the transfer is complete
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg8c.png)
135
PRELIMINARY
Data Calls
Set Up Your Phone
Transfer the Data
Your phone notifies you when the data call arrives, and
transfers the call to the connected device. You must use
the application running on the connected device to answer
the call.
End the Data Connection
When the data transfer is complete:
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Connection
>
Incoming Call
Do This To
1Press
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Next Call
2Press
S
scroll to
Data In Only
3Press
SELECT
(
+
)set the call format
4Connect your phone
to the device
enable the data transfer
Note: You cannot answer incoming voice calls when
your phone is in data mode. Any voice calls you
receive are treated as unanswered calls. To return a
voice call, reset your phone to voice mode as
described on page 136.
Do This To
End the call from the
connected device
close the connection
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg8d.png)
136
PRELIMINARY
Data Calls
Reset Normal Voice Operation
After making a data call, you must reset your phone to
resume normal voice operations. You cannot receive
voice calls when your phone is in data mode.
Your phone also reverts to normal voice operations when
you turn it off and then turn it back on.
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Connection
>
Incoming Call
Do This To
1Press
CHANGE
(
+
)select
Next Call
2Press
S
scroll to
Normal
3Press
SELECT
(
+
)reset your phone
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg8e.png)
137
PRELIMINARY
Security
Security
Assigning a New Code or
Password
Your phone’s unlock code is originally set to 1234, and the
security code is originally set to 000000. Your service
provider may reset these numbers before you receive your
phone.
If your service provider has not reset these numbers, we
recommend that you change them to prevent other users
from accessing your personal information. The unlock
code must contain four digits, and the security code must
contain six digits.
Notes:
•Your service provider may retain your phone’s security
code for customer service purposes. In this case, you
will not be able to use phone features that require you
to enter the security code.
•If the unlock code is the only code you can change,
the
New Passwords
menu is not available. In this case,
change the unlock code by selecting:
M
>
Settings
>
Security
>
Phone Lock
>
Unlock Code
.
To change a code or password:
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Security
>
New Passwords
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg8f.png)
138
PRELIMINARY
Security
If You Forget a Code or
Password
If you forget your security code, contact your service
provider.
If you forget your unlock code, try entering 1234 or the last
four digits of your phone number. If that does not work, do
the following at the
Enter Unlock Code
prompt:
Press To
1
S
scroll to the code or password
2
CHANGE
(
+
)select the code or password
3keypad keys enter your old code
4
OK
(
+
)submit your old code
5keypad keys enter the new code
6
OK
(
+
)assign the new code
7keypad keys re-enter the new code
8
OK
(
+
)confirm the new code
Press To
1
M
go to the unlock code bypass
screen
2keypad keys enter your security code
3
OK
(
+
)submit your security code
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg90.png)
139
PRELIMINARY
Security
Locking and Unlocking Your
Phone
You can lock your phone manually or set the phone to
lock automatically whenever you turn it off.
To use a locked phone, you must enter the unlock
code. A locked phone still rings or vibrates for incoming
calls or messages, but you must unlock it to answer.
You can make emergency calls on your phone even when
it is locked. For more information, see page 30.
Lock Your Phone Manually
Set Your Phone to Lock Automatically
You can set your phone to lock every time you turn it off.
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Security
>
Phone Lock
>
Lock Now
Press To
1keypad keys enter your unlock code
2
OK
(
+
)lock the phone
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Security
>
Phone Lock
>
Automatic Lock
>
On
Press To
1keypad keys enter your unlock code
2
OK
(
+
)activate automatic lock
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg91.png)
140
PRELIMINARY
Security
Unlock Your Phone
At the
Enter Unlock Code
prompt:
Locking and Unlocking Your
Keypad
You can lock your phone keypad to prevent accidental
keypresses (for example, when carrying your phone in a
purse or pocket).
Note: Incoming calls and messages unlock the keypad.
Restricting Calls
You can stop all incoming and/or outgoing calls, or you can
restrict them to the numbers stored in your phonebook.
Notes:
•You can make emergency calls when outgoing calls
are restricted.
•Your phone still receives incoming text messages
when incoming calls are restricted.
Press To
1keypad keys enter your unlock code
2
OK
(
+
)unlock your phone
Press To
M
*
lock or unlock your keypad
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg92.png)
141
PRELIMINARY
Security
•When you restrict incoming calls to numbers stored in
the phonebook, a valid incoming call may be restricted
if caller ID information for the call is not available
from the network.
Tip: The phonebook is not locked when you restrict
outgoing calls to numbers stored in the phonebook. To
prevent a user from adding (and then calling) a new
phonebook entry, you may want to lock the phonebook.
See the “Lock Application” item on page 56.
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Security
>
Restrict Calls
Press To
1keypad keys enter your unlock code
2
OK
(
+
)open the restrict calls menu
3
S
scroll to
Outgoing Calls
or
Incoming Calls
4
CHANGE
(
+
)select the option
5
CHANGE
(
+
)change the
Allow
setting
6
S
scroll to
All
,
None
, or
Phonebook
7
SELECT
(
+
)select the allowed calls
Activating Talk Secure
Your phone can attempt to send your calls using a
high-security connection, to prevent others from
intercepting them. For more information, see “Talk
Secure” on page 29.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg93.png)
142
PRELIMINARY
Security
Find the Feature
M
>
Settings
>
Security
>
Talk Secure
Press To
1
S
scroll to
Preferred
or
Off
2
SELECT
(
+
)switch talk secure on or off
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg94.png)
143
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Check these questions first if you have problems with
your phone. If you need additional help, contact the
Motorola Customer Call Center at 1-800-331-6456
(United States) or 1-800-461-4575 (Canada).
Question Answer
Is your phone
set up
correctly?
Press
M
#
. If you do not see
your phone number, contact your
service provider.
Is your battery
charged? Do
you see
B
in
the display?
The battery level indicator should
have at least one segment
showing (
C
). If it does not,
recharge your battery.
Does the
handset have
a signal? Do
you see
j
in
the display?
The signal strength indicator
should have at least one segment
showing (
1
). If it does not, move
to an area with a stronger signal
to use your phone.
Is the earpiece
volume too
low?
While on a call, press the upper
volume key on the side of your
phone.
Is the other
party unable
to hear you?
Your phone may be muted. Press
UNMUTE
(
+
) if necessary to
unmute the phone.
Also, make sure that your phone’s
microphone is not blocked by its
carrying case or a sticker.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg95.png)
144
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting
The following refer to specific problems:
Has the phone
been
damaged,
dropped, or
gotten wet?
Dropping your phone, getting it
wet, or using a non-Motorola
battery or battery charger can
damage the phone. The phone’s
limited warranty does not cover
liquid damage or damage caused
from using non-Motorola
accessories.
Was a
non-Motorola
battery or
battery
charger used?
Problem Solution
My phone was
stolen. To
whom should I
report this?
Report a stolen phone to the
police and to your service provider
(the company that sends you your
monthly wireless service bill).
I forgot my
password.
See “If You Forget a Code or
Password” on page 138.
I pressed the
power key, but
nothing
happened.
Be sure to press and hold
P
(the power key) until the display
appears and you hear an audible
alert. (This could take several
seconds.) If nothing happens,
check that a charged battery is
installed.
Question Answer
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg96.png)
145
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting
The display
says:
Enter
Unlock Code
.
How do I
unlock my
phone?
Enter the factory-preset unlock
code (1234), or the last four digits
of your phone number. If this fails,
call your service provider (the
company that sends you your
monthly wireless service bill).
My phone
asks for an
unlock code
when I try to
open a feature.
The application you want is
locked. If you do not know the
unlock code, see “If You Forget a
Code or Password” on page 138.
My phone
does not ring.
If you see
t
or
y
in the
display, then the ringer is turned
off. See “Ring Styles” on page 95.
Also, the ringer may be set to
Silent
even though your phone is
set to an audible ring style. See
“Customizing a Ring Style” on
page 96.
My phone
rings even
though I
selected the
Silent
(or
Vibrate
) ring
style.
The ringer may be set to play a
tone even though your phone is
set to a silent ring style. See
“Customizing a Ring Style” on
page 96.
Problem Solution
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg97.png)
146
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting
I tried to place
a call and
heard an
alternating
high/low tone.
Your call did not reach the
wireless system. You may have
dialed the number too soon after
turning the phone on. Wait until
you see the idle display before
making a call.
I cannot send/
receive calls.
Make sure that you have a phone
signal (see the “Signal Strength
Indicator” item on page 24). Avoid
electrical or radio interference,
and obstructions such as bridges,
parking garages, or tall buildings.
Your phone also may have the
Restrict Calls
feature turned on.
If you know the unlock code, you
can change this setting in the
security menu (
M
>
Settings
>
Security
).
My phone has
poor reception
and drops
calls.
Make sure that your antenna is
not bent or damaged.
Also, make sure you have a phone
signal (see the “Signal Strength
Indicator” item on page 24). Stay
clear of any obstructions such as
bridges, parking garages, or tall
buildings.
Problem Solution
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg98.png)
147
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting
I cannot hear
others on my
phone.
While on a call, press the upper
volume key. The display should
show the volume increasing.
Also, make sure that your phone’s
earpiece is not blocked by its
carrying case.
I cannot open
my inbox.
Before you can use text or
information services messages,
you must set up the appropriate
inbox. See “Setting Up the Text
Message Inbox” on page 85.
How do I see
the calls I sent
or received?
To see the most recent calls you
dialed or received:
M
>
Recent Calls
>
Received Calls
or
Dialed Calls
Problem Solution
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg99.png)
148
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting
My phone will
not send
voicemail
commands,
passwords, or
other codes.
Your phone sends commands and
passwords as DTMF tones. You
can set your phone’s DTMF tones
to be
On
or
Off
. If you have trouble
sending numbers, check your
DTMF setting.
1From the idle display, press:
M
>
Settings
>
Other Settings
>
Initial Setup
>
DTMF
2Press
S
to scroll to
On
.
3Press
SELECT
(
+
) to select it.
My phone’s
display is too
dark.
Use the
Contrast
feature (see
page 60) to change the level of
contrast in your phone display.
You can also use the
Backlight
feature (see page 59) to change
the length of time that the display
backlight stays on.
My battery
didn’t last as
long as I
expected.
What can I do
to extend
battery life?
Your battery’s performance is
affected by charge time, feature
use, temperature changes,
backlight use, and other factors.
For tips on extending your battery
life, see “Battery Use” on page 26.
Problem Solution
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg9a.png)
149
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting
I am unable to
record a voice
note, voice
name, or voice
shortcut.
Try moving to a quieter location to
make your voice recording. Hold
the phone about four inches (10
centimeters) from your mouth,
and speak directly into the phone
in a normal tone of voice.
My TTY device
doesn’t work
with my
phone.
Your phone must be set to a TTY
mode for the phone to detect your
TTY device. See “TTY Operation”
on page 126.
I plugged the
data cable into
my phone but
my phone did
not beep. How
do I know if
the data cable
is ready to go?
The beep indicates that you are
set up correctly. If you did not hear
a beep, make sure that both ends
of the data cable are connected—
the smaller end to your phone and
the larger end to your computer.
Also, your computer may have
deactivated the port to save
power. Try opening an application
that uses the port, like a fax or
dial-up application, to
automatically activate the port.
Problem Solution
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg9b.png)
150
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting
My phone
beeped when I
attached the
data cable, but
my data
applications
don’t work.
You must be in an area with digital
coverage. Check your phone’s
display for the digital signal
indicator (
F
).
Some wireless networks may not
support data transmission. If you
see the digital indicator, but you
are roaming on an unfamiliar
network, this may be the case.
Also, remember that data
transmission usually requires a
subscription. Call your service
provider for more information.
When sending
data with the
data cable,
why does the
computer
show a
connection
rate of 19200
Kbps?
19200 Kbps is the data transfer
rate of the connection between
your computer and the phone.
The rate of the connection
between your phone and the
network is displayed on your
phone, and will be either 14400 or
9600 Kbps.
I can’t end my
data call by
closing the
application on
my computer.
What can I do?
Try pressing
O
on your phone.
Or try disconnecting the cable or
turning off the phone. If possible,
always close the connection
through your computer, as these
alternative methods may disrupt
the application on your computer.
Problem Solution
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg9c.png)
151
PRELIMINARY
Troubleshooting
I launched the
micro-browser
but the display
says:
Service Not
Available
.
You may be in an area without
service. If you have wireless
service, look in the display for the
digital signal indicator (
F
). If you
do not see the indicator, you may
be in an area that has only analog
service or no service at all. If you
see the digital signal indicator, you
may be connected to a digital
network that does not support
Internet access.
I launched the
micro-browser
but the display
says:
Data Server
Unavailable
.
Try again in a few minutes. The
servers may be temporarily busy.
Problem Solution
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg9d.png)
152
PRELIMINARY
Programming Instructions
Programming
Instructions
Follow this procedure if you need to program your
phone’s phone number(s).
Note: Programming is normally done by a trained
technician at the site of purchase. Users should not make
changes other than ones in the following procedure.
Before programming, ask your service provider for your:
•Carrier System ID (a one- to five-digit number)
•10-digit MIN (Mobile Identification Number)
Press To
1
#
, the Carrier System
ID number,
#
,
*
,
N
enter programming
mode
2
0
,
0
,
0
,
0
,
0
,
0
(This is the security code
that is in the phone when
it is shipped from the
factory.)
enter the security
code
3
OK
(
+
)submit the security
code
4
S
scroll to
MIN
5
CHANGE
(
+
)open the MIN
display
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg9e.png)
153
PRELIMINARY
Programming Instructions
6keypad keys for the
10-digit MIN
enter the new MIN
7
OK
(
+
)store the new MIN
8
DONE
(
-
)exit programming
mode
Press To
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg9f.png)
154
PRELIMINARY
Specific Absorption Rate Data
Specific Absorption
Rate Data
This model phone meets the government’s
requirements for exposure to radio waves.
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is
designed and manufactured not to exceed limits for exposure
to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the U.S. Federal
Communications Commission for the United States and by
Health Canada for Canada. These limits are part of
comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of
RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are
based on standards that were developed by independent
scientific organizations through periodic and thorough
evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a
substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all
persons, regardless of age or health.
The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a
unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate,
or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC and by Health Canada
is 1.6 W/kg.
1
Tests for SAR are conducted using standard
operating positions accepted by the FCC and by Industry
Canada with the phone transmitting at its highest certified
power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is
determined at the highest certified power level, the actual
SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the
maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to
operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power
required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bga0.png)
155
PRELIMINARY
Specific Absorption Rate Data
to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power
output.
Before a phone model is available for sale to the public in
the U.S. and Canada, it must be tested and certified to the
FCC and Industry Canada that it does not exceed the limit
established by each government for safe exposure. The
tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear
and worn on the body) reported to the FCC and available for
review by Industry Canada. The highest SAR value for this
model phone when tested for use at the ear is ____ W/kg
2
,
and when worn on the body, as described in this user guide, is
____ W/kg.
2
(Body-worn measurements differ among phone
models, depending upon available accessories and regulatory
requirements). While there may be differences between the
SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all
meet the governmental requirements for safe exposure.
The FCC and Industry Canada have granted an Equipment
Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR
levels evaluated as being in compliance with the FCC and
Health Canada RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on
this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found
under the Display Grant section of:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid
after searching on FCC ID ________. You may also refer to
Motorola’s Web site:
http://www.motorola.com/rfhealth
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bga1.png)
156
PRELIMINARY
Specific Absorption Rate Data
Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR)
can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet
Association (CTIA) Web site:
http://phonefacts.net
or the Canadian Wireless Telecommunications
Association (CWTA) Web site:
http://www.cwta.ca
1. In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile
phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over
one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial
margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and
to account for any variations in measurements.
2. Additional related information includes the Motorola testing
protocol, assessment procedure, and measurement uncertainty
range for this product.
ITC01-064
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bga2.png)
157
PRELIMINARY
Additional Health and Safety Information
The U.S. Food and Drug
Administration's Center for
Devices and Radiological Health
Consumer Update on Mobile Phones
Additional Health and Safety Information
FDA has been receiving inquiries about the safety of mobile
phones, including cellular phones and PCS phones. The
following summarizes what is known—and what remains
unknown—about whether these products can pose a hazard
to health, and what can be done to minimize any potential
risk. This information may be used to respond to questions.
Why the concern?
Mobile phones emit low levels of radio frequency energy (i.e.,
radio frequency radiation) in the microwave range while being
used. They also emit very low levels of radio frequency energy
(RF), considered non-significant, when in the stand-by mode.
It is well known that high levels of RF can produce biological
damage through heating effects (this is how your microwave
oven is able to cook food). However, it is not known whether,
to what extent, or through what mechanism, lower levels of RF
might cause adverse health effects as well. Although some
research has been done to address these questions, no clear
picture of the biological effects of this type of radiation has
emerged to date. Thus, the available science does not allow
us to conclude that mobile phones are absolutely safe, or that
they are unsafe. However, the available scientific evidence
does not demonstrate any adverse health effects associated
with the use of mobile phones.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bga3.png)
158
PRELIMINARY
Additional Health and Safety Information
What kinds of phones are in question?
Questions have been raised about hand-held mobile phones,
the kind that have a built-in antenna that is positioned
close to the user's head during normal telephone
conversation. These types of mobile phones are of
concern because of the short distance between the
phone's antenna—the primary source of the RF—and the
person's head. The exposure to RF from mobile phones in
which the antenna is located at greater distances from the
user (on the outside of a car, for example) is drastically lower
than that from hand-held phones, because a person's RF
exposure decreases rapidly with distance from the source.
The safety of so-called “cordless phones,” which have a base
unit connected to the telephone wiring in a house and which
operate at far lower power levels and frequencies, has not
been questioned.
How much evidence is there that hand-held
mobile phones might be harmful?
Briefly, there is not enough evidence to know for sure, either
way; however, research efforts are on-going. The existing
scientific evidence is conflicting and many of the studies that
have been done to date have suffered from flaws in their
research methods. Animal experiments investigating the
effects of RF exposures characteristic of mobile phones have
yielded conflicting results. A few animal studies, however,
have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the
development of cancer in laboratory animals. In one study,
mice genetically altered to be predisposed to developing one
type of cancer developed more than twice as many such
cancers when they were exposed to RF energy compared to
controls. There is much uncertainty among scientists about
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bga4.png)
159
PRELIMINARY
Additional Health and Safety Information
whether results obtained from animal studies apply to the use
of mobile phones. First, it is uncertain how to apply the results
obtained in rats and mice to humans. Second, many of the
studies that showed increased tumor development used
animals that had already been treated with cancer-
causing chemicals, and other studies exposed the animals
to the RF virtually continuously—up to 22 hours per day.
For the past five years in the United States, the mobile phone
industry has supported research into the safety of mobile
phones. This research has resulted in two findings in
particular that merit additional study:
1
In a hospital-based, case-control study, researchers
looked for an association between mobile phone use and
either glioma (a type of brain cancer) or acoustic neuroma
(a benign tumor of the nerve sheath). No statistically
significant association was found between mobile phone
use and acoustic neuroma. There was also no association
between mobile phone use and gliomas when all types of
types of gliomas were considered together. It should be
noted that the average length of mobile phone exposure in
this study was less than three years.
When 20 types of glioma were considered separately,
however, an association was found between mobile phone
use and one rare type of glioma, neuroepithelliomatous
tumors. It is possible with multiple comparisons of the
same sample that this association occurred by chance.
Moreover, the risk did not increase with how often the
mobile phone was used, or the length of the calls. In fact,
the risk actually decreased with cumulative hours of
mobile phone use. Most cancer causing agents increase
risk with increased exposure. An ongoing study of brain
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bga5.png)
160
PRELIMINARY
Additional Health and Safety Information
cancers by the National Cancer Institute is expected to
bear on the accuracy and repeatability of these results.
1
2
Researchers conducted a large battery of laboratory
tests to assess the effects of exposure to mobile
phone RF on genetic material. These included tests
for several kinds of abnormalities, including mutations,
chromosomal aberrations, DNA strand breaks, and
structural changes in the genetic material of blood cells
called lymphocytes. None of the tests showed any effect
of the RF except for the micronucleus assay, which
detects structural effects on the genetic material. The cells
in this assay showed changes after exposure to simulated
cell phone radiation, but only after 24 hours of exposure. It
is possible that exposing the test cells to radiation for this
long resulted in heating. Since this assay is known to be
sensitive to heating, heat alone could have caused the
abnormalities to occur. The data already in the literature
on the response of the micronucleus assay to RF are
conflicting. Thus, follow-up research is necessary.
2
FDA is currently working with government, industry, and
academic groups to ensure the proper follow-up to these
industry-funded research findings. Collaboration with the
Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA) in
particular is expected to lead to FDA providing research
recommendations and scientific oversight of new CTIA-
funded research based on such recommendations.
Two other studies of interest have been reported recently in
the literature:
1
Two groups of 18 people were exposed to simulated
mobile phone signals under laboratory conditions while
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bga6.png)
161
PRELIMINARY
Additional Health and Safety Information
they performed cognitive function tests. There were no
changes in the subjects' ability to recall words, numbers,
or pictures, or in their spatial memory, but they were
able to make choices more quickly in one visual test
when they were exposed to simulated mobile phone
signals. This was the only change noted among more
than 20 variables compared.
3
2
In a study of 209 brain tumor cases and 425 matched
controls, there was no increased risk of brain tumors
associated with mobile phone use. When tumors did exist
in certain locations, however, they were more likely to be
on the side of the head where the mobile phone was
used.
Because this occurred in only a small number of cases,
the increased likelihood was too small to be statistically
significant.
4
In summary, we do not have enough information at this point
to assure the public that there are, or are not, any low incident
health problems associated with use of mobile phones. FDA
continues to work with all parties, including other federal
agencies and industry, to assure that research is undertaken
to provide the necessary answers to the outstanding
questions about the safety of mobile phones.
What is known about cases of human cancer that
have been reported in users of hand-held mobile
phones?
Some people who have used mobile phones have been
diagnosed with brain cancer. But it is important to understand
that this type of cancer also occurs among people who have
not used mobile phones. In fact, brain cancer occurs in the
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bga7.png)
162
PRELIMINARY
Additional Health and Safety Information
U.S. population at a rate of about 6 new cases per 100,000
people each year. At that rate, assuming 80 million users of
mobile phones (a number increasing at a rate of about 1
million per month), about 4800 cases of brain cancer
would be expected each year among those 80 million
people, whether or not they used their phones. Thus it is
not possible to tell whether any individual's cancer arose
because of the phone, or whether it would have happened
anyway. A key question is whether the risk of getting a
particular form of cancer is greater among people who use
mobile phones than among the rest of the population. One
way to answer that question is to compare the usage of
mobile phones among people with brain cancer with the use
of mobile phones among appropriately matched people
without brain cancer. This is called a case-control study. The
current case-control study of brain cancers by the National
Cancer Institute, as well as the follow-up research to be
sponsored by industry, will begin to generate this type of
information.
What is FDA's role concerning the safety of
mobile phones?
Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-
emitting consumer products such as mobile phones before
marketing, as it does with new drugs or medical devices.
However, the agency has authority to take action if mobile
phones are shown to emit radiation at a level that is
hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the
manufacturers of mobile phones to notify users of the health
hazard and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that the
hazard no longer exists.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bga8.png)
163
PRELIMINARY
Additional Health and Safety Information
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA
regulatory actions at this time, FDA has urged the mobile
phone industry to take a number of steps to assure public
safety. The agency has recommended that the industry:
•support needed research into possible biological
effects of RF of the type emitted by mobile phones
•design mobile phones in a way that minimizes any RF
exposure to the user that is not necessary for device
function
•cooperate in providing mobile phone users with the best
possible information on what is known about possible
effects of mobile phone use on human health
At the same time, FDA belongs to an interagency working
group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for
different aspects of mobile phone safety to ensure a
coordinated effort at the federal level. These agencies are:
•National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
•Environmental Protection Agency
•Federal Communications Commission
•Occupational Health and Safety Administration
•National Telecommunications and Information
Administration
The National Institutes of Health also participates in this
group.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bga9.png)
164
PRELIMINARY
Additional Health and Safety Information
In the absence of conclusive information about
any possible risk, what can concerned
individuals do?
If there is a risk from these products—and at this point we
do not know that there is—it is probably very small. But if
people are concerned about avoiding even potential risks,
there are simple steps they can take to do so. For example,
time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives.
Those persons who spend long periods of time on their hand-
held mobile phones could consider holding lengthy
conversations on conventional phones and reserving the
hand-held models for shorter conversations or for situations
when other types of phones are not available.
People who must conduct extended conversations in their
cars every day could switch to a type of mobile phone that
places more distance between their bodies and the source of
the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with
distance. For example, they could switch to:
•a mobile phone in which the antenna is located outside
the vehicle
•a hand-held phone with a built-in antenna connected to a
different antenna mounted on the outside of the car or
built into a separate package
•a headset with a remote antenna to a mobile phone
carried at the waist
Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that mobile
phones are harmful. But if people are concerned about the
radio frequency energy from these products, taking the simple
precautions outlined above can reduce any possible risk.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgaa.png)
165
PRELIMINARY
Additional Health and Safety Information
Where can I find additional information?
For additional information, see the following Web sites:
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) RF
Safety Program (select “Information on Human Exposure
to RF Fields from Cellular and PCS Radio Transmitters”):
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety
World Health Organization (WHO) International
Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (select Qs
& As):
http://www.who.int/emf
United Kingdom, National Radiological Protection Board:
http://www.nrpb.org.uk
Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association
(CTIA):
http://www.wow-com.com
U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Center for
Devices and Radiological Health:
http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/consumer/
1. Muscat et al. Epidemiological Study of Cellular Telephone Use
and Malignant Brain Tumors. In: State of the Science
Symposium;1999 June 20; Long Beach, California.
2. Tice et al. Tests of mobile phone signals for activity in
genotoxicity and other laboratory assays. In: Annual Meeting of
the Environmental Mutagen Society; March 29, 1999,
Washington, D.C.; and personal communication, unpublished
results.
3. Preece, AW, Iwi, G, Davies-Smith, A, Wesnes, K, Butler, S, Lim,
E, and Varey, A. Effect of a 915-MHz simulated mobile phone
signal on cognitive function in man. Int. J. Radiat. Biol., April 8,
1999.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgab.png)
166
PRELIMINARY
Additional Health and Safety Information
4. Hardell, L, Nasman, A, Pahlson, A, Hallquist, A and Mild, KH.
Use of cellular telephones and the risk for brain tumors: a case-
control study. Int. J. Oncol., 15: 113-116, 1999.
ITC00-010
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgac.png)
167
PRELIMINARY
Warranty
Warranty
Limited Warranty for Motorola Personal
Communications Products and Accessories
Purchased in the United States and Canada
I. What This Warranty Covers
Defects in materials and workmanship in the following new
“
Products
”
manufactured, sold or certified by Motorola, with
which this limited warranty is included in/on the package:
(a) wireless cellular telephones, pagers and two-way radios
that operate via “Personal Radio Service” (such as Family
Radio Service and General Mobile Radio Service), together
with software imbedded in any of these products, and
(b) subject to the following exceptions, accessories or
software sold for use with these products.
•Battery Exception. This limited warranty extends only to
batteries in which the fully-charged capacity falls below
80% of rated capacity and batteries that leak;
•Software Exceptions. This limited warranty extends only
to physical defects in the media (such as CD-ROM) that
tangibly embodies each copy of any software sold and/or
certified by Motorola for use with Products. Software that
is not tangibly embodied in media and that is purchased
separately from Products (such as software that is
downloaded from the internet) comes “as is” and
without warranty.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgad.png)
168
PRELIMINARY
Warranty
II. What the Period of Coverage Is
Subject to the following exceptions, one year from the date the
Products are purchased by the first end-user:
•90-Day Warranty Exception. The warranty is for 90
days for: (a) any software tangibly embodied in media
or (b) any accessories for two-way radios that are
covered by this warranty, as described in Section I,
above.
•Limited Lifetime Warranty Exception. The warranty is a
limited lifetime warranty for the lifetime of ownership by
the first end-user of the following products, only:
(a) decorative covers, including bezel, PhoneWrap™ or
case (any model); and (b) ear buds and boom headsets
that transmit mono sound through a wire connection (this
does not include ear buds or boom headsets that either
transmit stereo sound or that are wireless, or both).
•Repair/Replacement Exception. The warranty is for the
balance of the original warranty or for 90 days from the
date returned and delivered to the first end-user,
whichever is longer.
III. Who is Covered
This warranty extends to you only if you are the first end-user
purchaser.
IV. What We Will Do to Correct Warranty Problems
At no charge to you, we have the option to repair or replace
the Products that do not conform to the warranty, or to refund
the Products’ purchase price. We may use functionally
equivalent reconditioned/refurbished/pre-owned or new
Products or parts. No software updates are provided.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgae.png)
169
PRELIMINARY
Warranty
V. How to Get Warranty Service
PLEASE CALL US — DO NOT SHIP:
Accessories and software—call the number designated for
the product with which they are used.
You will receive instructions on how to ship the Products to
Motorola or our designated resource. If instructed to ship the
Products, you must ship them with freight, duties and
insurance prepaid. Regardless of where you are instructed to
return the Products, you must include: (a) a copy of your
receipt, bill of sale or other comparable proof of purchase;
(b) a written description of the problem; (c) the name of your
service provider (if this Product requires subscription service);
(d) the name and location of the installation facility (if
applicable) and, most importantly; (e) your address and
telephone number. If requested, you must also return all
detachable parts such as antennas, batteries and chargers.
RETAIN YOUR ORIGINAL PROOF OF PURCHASE.
For Products we ask you ship to us, we will ship repaired or
replacement Products at our expense for the freight and
insurance, but at your expense for any duties. If additional
information is needed, please contact us at the telephone
number listed above.
USA Canada
Cellular 1-800-331-6456 All Products
1-800-461-4575 Paging 1-800-548-9954
FRS Radios 1-800-353-2729 TTY (Text Telephone)
1-888-390-6456 TTY (Text Telephone)
1-888-390-6456
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgaf.png)
170
PRELIMINARY
Warranty
VI. What This Warranty Does Not Cover
• Products that are operated in combination with
ancillary or peripheral equipment or software not
furnished or otherwise certified by Motorola for
use with the Products (“ancillary equipment”), or
any damage to the Products or ancillary
equipment as a result of such use. Among other
things, “ancillary equipment” includes batteries,
chargers, adaptors, and power supplies not
manufactured or supplied by Motorola. Any of these
voids the warranty.
•Someone other than Motorola (or its authorized service
centers) tests, adjusts, installs, maintains, alters,
modifies or services the Products in any way. Any of
these voids the warranty.
•Rechargeable batteries that: (a) are charged by other
than the Motorola-approved battery charger specified for
charging such batteries; (b) have any broken seals or
show evidence of tampering; (c) are used in equipment
other than the Product for which they are specified; or
(d) are charged and stored at temperatures greater than
60 degrees centigrade. Any of these voids the warranty.
•Products that have: (a) serial numbers or date tags that
have been removed, altered or obliterated; (b) board
serial numbers that do not match each other, or board
serial numbers that do not match the housing; or
(c) nonconforming or non-Motorola housings or parts.
Any of these voids the warranty.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgb0.png)
171
PRELIMINARY
Warranty
•Defects or damage that result from: (a) use of the
Products in a manner that is not normal or customary;
(b) improper operation or misuse; (c) accident or
neglect such as dropping the Products onto hard
surfaces; (d) contact with water, rain, extreme
humidity or heavy perspiration; (e) contact with sand,
dirt or the like; or (f) contact with extreme heat, or spills of
food or liquid.
•Physical damage to the surface of the Products,
including scratches, cracks or other damage to a display
screen, lens or other externally exposed parts.
•Failure of Products that is due primarily to any
communication service or signal you may subscribe to or
use with the Products.
•Coil cords that are stretched or that have any broken
modular tabs.
•Leased Products.
Flat-rate repair rates may apply to Products not covered by
this warranty. To obtain information about Products needing
repairs that are not covered by this warranty, please call the
telephone number previously listed. We will provide
information on repair availability, rates, methods of payment,
where to send the Products, etc.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgb1.png)
172
PRELIMINARY
Warranty
VII. Some Other Limitations
This is Motorola’s complete warranty for the Products,
and states your exclusive remedies. This warranty is
given in lieu of all other express warranties. Implied
warranties, including without limitation, the implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose, are given only if specifically required
by applicable law. Otherwise, they are specifically
excluded.
No warranty is made as to coverage, availability, or grade
of service provided by the Products, whether through a
service provider or otherwise.
No warranty is made that the software will meet your
requirements or will work in combination with any
hardware or applications software products provided by
third parties, that the operation of the software products
will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all defects in
the software products will be corrected.
In no event shall Motorola be liable, whether in contract
or tort (including negligence) for damages in excess of
the purchase price of the Product, or for any indirect,
incidental, special or consequential damages of any kind,
or loss of revenue or profits, loss of business, loss of
information or data, or other financial loss arising out of
or in connection with the ability or inability to use the
Products, to the full extent these damages may be
disclaimed by law.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgb2.png)
173
PRELIMINARY
Warranty
VIII. Patent and Software Provisions
At Motorola’s expense, we will defend you, and pay costs and
damages that may be finally awarded against you, to the
extent that a lawsuit is based on a claim that the Products
directly infringe a United States patent. Our obligation is
conditioned on: (a) you notifying us promptly in writing
when you receive notice of the claim; (b) you giving us sole
control of the defense of the suit and all negotiations for its
settlement or compromise; and (c) should the Products
become, or in Motorola's opinion be likely to become, the
subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent,
you permit us, at our option and expense, either to: procure
for you the right to continue using the Products; replace or
modify them so that they become non-infringing; or grant you
a credit for such Products, as depreciated, and accept their
return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over
the lifetime of the Products, as established by Motorola.
Motorola will have no liability to you with respect to any claim
of patent infringement that is based upon the combination of
the Products or parts furnished under this limited warranty
with ancillary equipment, as defined in VI., above.
This is Motorola’s entire liability with respect to
infringement of patents by the Products.
IX. State Law and Other Jurisdiction Rights
Some states and other jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion
or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or
limitation on the length of an implied warranty, so the above
limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgb3.png)
174
PRELIMINARY
Warranty
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also
have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
To obtain information on Motorola Personal
Communications Products, including warranty service,
accessories and optional Extended Warranties on
selected Products, please call:
Accessories and software—call the telephone number
designated above for the product with which they are used.
DO NOT SHIP PRODUCTS TO THESE ADDRESSES —
INSTEAD PLEASE CALL.
To correspond with Motorola about Products, please write us
at:
http://www.motorola.com
or at:
ITC01-078
USA Canada
Cellular 1-800-331-6456 All Products
1-800-461-4575 Paging 1-800-548-9954
FRS Radios 1-800-353-2729 TTY (Text Telephone)
1-888-390-6456 TTY (Text Telephone)
1-888-390-6456
In the USA: In Canada:
Motorola, Inc. Motorola Canada Limited
600 North U.S. Highway 45 5875 Whittle Road
Libertyville, IL 60048 Mississauga, ON L4Z 2H4
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgb4.png)
175
PRELIMINARY
Product Registration
Product Registration
Online Product Registration:
http://www.motorola.com/warranty
Product registration is an important step toward enjoying your
new Motorola product. Registering helps us facilitate warranty
service, and permits us to contact you should your product
require an update or other service. Registration is for U.S.
residents only and is not required for warranty coverage.
Please retain your original dated sales receipt for your
records. For warranty service of your Motorola Personal
Communications Product you will need to provide a copy of
your dated sales receipt to confirm warranty status.
Thank you for choosing a Motorola product.
Export Law
Assurances
This product is controlled under the export regulations of the
United States of America and Canada. The Governments of
the United States of America and Canada may restrict the
exportation or re-exportation of this product to certain
destinations. For further information contact the U.S.
Department of Commerce or the Canadian Department of
Foreign Affairs and International Trade.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgb5.png)
176
PRELIMINARY
Index
Index
A
accessories
optional 10, 80, 109,
126, 128, 131
standard 18
accessory connector port
1
Add Digits
feature 64
alert
creating 97–102
defined 95
downloading a sound
file 114–115
reminders, turning on/off
103
selecting 96
setting sound file as ring
tone 90
storing a sound file
89–90
analog signal indicator
defined 24
illustration 23
animation 59
antenna 1
application, locking 56
appointments. See
datebook
Attach Number
feature 32,
64
auto PIN dial 58
automatic redial
turning on/off 58
using 28–29
B
backlight 59
battery
car kit charger time 130
charging 19–20
extending battery life
26–27, 59, 148
installing 18–19
level indicator 20, 23,
24
meter 55
battery save 59
blackjack 120–121
block cursor, defined 40
browse text mode 41
browser alerts 52
browser. See
micro-browser
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgb6.png)
177
PRELIMINARY
Index
C
calculator 116–118
calendar. See datebook
call
adding digits after phone
number 64
alert, creating 97–102
alert, selecting 96
answer options 56
answering 22
call waiting 35
calling card 33
canceling 30
data call 133–136
datebook, opening 36
deleting 63–64
dialed calls list 34, 36,
63–64
dialing 21
dialing a recent call
63–64
emergency number 30
ending 22
ignoring 30
in-call timer 55–56
incoming call type,
setting 135–136
message center,
accessing 36
muting 36
placing 21
call (continued)
prefix digits, inserting
32
privacy 29, 141
received calls list 34,
36, 63–64
receiving 22
recent calls 63–64
restricting 140–141
ring style, setting 95
secure connection 29,
141
sending 21
speakerphone,
activating 36
storing 63–64
terminating 30
three-way call 35
timing 65–66
unanswered call 29
voice dial 34
Call Failed
message 28
call timers
described 65–66
resetting 66
viewing 66
call waiting 35
caller ID 29, 30
calling card call 33
calling line identification.
See caller ID
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgb7.png)
178
PRELIMINARY
Index
car kit
automatic answer 128
automatic hands-free
129
charger time 130
power-off delay 129
clock
defined 24
illustration 23
codes
changing 137–138
default 21, 137
if you forget a
code/password
138
computer
connecting to phone
131–133
contrast, display 60
currency converter 118
cursor 40
customer service, calling
51
customizing the menu 125
D
data call
connecting to external
device 131–133
incoming call format,
setting 135–136
receiving 134–136
data call (continued)
sending 133–134
date, setting 58
datebook
adding an event 77
alarm 77
calendar 75
changing event
information 77
copying an event 78
day view 76
deleting an event 79
event reminders, turning
on/off 103
event view 76
reminders 77
week view 75
Datebook Menu
75, 76
deleting a call 63–64
dialed calls list 34, 36,
63–64
dialing a number 21
Dialing Menu
32, 65
digital signal indicator
defined 24
illustration 23
display
animation 59
backlight 59
contrast 60
described 23–25
greeting 58
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgb8.png)
179
PRELIMINARY
Index
display (continued)
idle display 23
illustration 23
language 59
zoom setting 25, 59
drafts folder 53
DTMF tones 36, 60, 64,
148
E
earpiece
illustration 1
volume, adjusting 25
email address, storing in
phonebook 68–70
email, sending 71–72,
91–93
emergency number 30
end key
functions 1, 22
menu functions 37
ending a call 22
Enter Unlock Code
message 138, 140
Entry Method
menu 46
event alert 96
exchange rate, calculating
118
external device
connecting to phone
131–133
F
factory settings, resetting
60–61
falling numbers 122
flashing cursor, defined 40
FM Stereo Radio Headset
51, 80–82
G
games 119–124
greeting, display 58
H
hands-free mode
automatic answer 128
automatic call routing
129
charger time 130
defined 128
power-off delay 129
speakerphone,
activating 36
headset
automatic answer 128
FM Stereo Radio
Headset 51,
80–82
headset jack 1
high-security connection
29, 141
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgb9.png)
180
PRELIMINARY
Index
I
idle display, defined 23
ignoring a call 30
in use indicator
defined 24
illustration 23
inbox, text message
85–86
in-call timer 55–56
incoming call
canceling 30
ignoring 30
terminating 30
type, setting 135–136
Incoming Call
message
29
indicators
battery level 20, 23, 24
digital/analog signal 23,
24
in use 23, 24
loud ring style 25, 95
menu 23, 24
message waiting 23,
24, 87
missed call 30
ring and vibrate ring
style 25, 95
ring style 23, 25, 95
roam 23, 24
signal strength 23, 24
silent alert 25
indicators (continued)
silent ring style 25, 95
soft ring style 25, 95
vibrate ring style 25, 95
voice message waiting
23, 24, 84
voice name 67
iTAP software 46–49
K
key
end 1, 22, 37
left soft key 1, 23, 37,
125
lock 56, 140
menu 1, 10, 23, 24, 37
power 1, 20
right soft key 1, 23, 37,
125
scroll 1, 37
send 1, 21, 22
voice 1, 71, 107
volume control 1, 25
keypad
answering calls 56
locking and unlocking
56, 140
volume, setting 97
L
language, setting 59
Last Calls Menu
64
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgba.png)
181
PRELIMINARY
Index
left soft key
customizing 125
functions 1, 23, 37
Line Not Secure
message
29
lock
applications 56
keypad 56, 140
phone 139–140
voice notes 111
lock application feature 56
loud ring style indicator
25, 95
Low Battery
message 24
M
making a call 21
master clear 61
master reset 60
Memory is Full!
message
87
menu
Browser Menu
114
customizing 125
Datebook Menu
75, 76
Dialing Menu
32, 65
entering text 39–40,
41–49
Entry Method
menu 46
features 50–62
language, setting 59
Last Calls Menu
64
menu (continued)
lists 38
locking applications 56
My Tones Menu
101, 102
navigating 10, 37
Phonebook Menu
67
Quick Note Menu
93–94
rearranging features
125
scroll feature 59
Text Msg Menu
88–89
using features 10,
38–40
Voice Notes Menu
108,
109, 110
menu indicator
defined 23, 24
illustration 23
menu key 1, 10, 23, 24, 37
message
browser alert 52
deleting, text 87–89
dialing number from 32
drafts folder 53
inbox setup, text
message 85–86
locking, text 87–89
outbox 52, 94
quick note 93–94
reading, text 87–89
receiving, text 86–87
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgbb.png)
182
PRELIMINARY
Index
message (continued)
reminders, receiving 84,
87
reminders, turning on/off
103
sending 32, 91–93
sound, storing 89–90
status 94
text 85–94
voicemail 83–84
message waiting indicator
defined 24
displayed 87
illustration 23
micro-browser
browser alerts 52
sound, downloading
114–115
using 113–114
microphone 1
missed call indicator 30
Missed Call
message 30
missed call, dialing 34
muting a call 36
my telephone number 22,
36, 54
my tones 97–102
My Tones Menu
101, 102
N
network settings 61
notepad
defined 64
entering digits 64
retrieving digits 64
number, viewing your own
22, 54
numeric text mode 41
O
one-touch dial
defined 31
using 31
voicemail number 31
optional accessory,
defined 10
optional feature, defined
10
outbox 52, 94
P
passwords. See codes
pause character 33
phone
answer options 56
codes 137–138
connecting to external
device 131–133
erase user-entered
information 61
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgbc.png)
183
PRELIMINARY
Index
phone (continued)
feature specifications
36, 55
information 36
keypad, locking and
unlocking 56,
140
locking 139–140
muting a call 36
reset all options 60
secure connection 29,
141
security code 137
specifications 36, 55
turning on/off 20
unlock code 21, 137,
138
unlocking 21, 139–140
voice dial 34
phone number
active phone line,
changing 54
adding digits after 64
attaching to prefix digits
32
attaching two numbers
64
redialing 28
sending text message to
32
storing in phonebook
68–70
phone number (continued)
viewing your own 22,
36, 54
voice dial 34
phonebook
attaching two numbers
64
capacity, checking 73
deleting an entry 72
dialing a number 71–72
editing an entry 72
email address 67
entry name 67
fields 67
number type indicator
67
one-touch dial 31
phone number 67
prefix digits, inserting
32
ringer ID,
activating/deactiv
ating 96–97
ringer ID, defined 69, 96
ringer ID, setting 69
sending an email 71–72
sorting entries 73
speed dial number 67,
69
speed dial number,
defined 31
speed dial, using 31
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgbd.png)
184
PRELIMINARY
Index
phonebook (continued)
storing an entry 68–70
voice name entry 70–71
voice name indicator 67
Phonebook Menu
67
PIN code, dialing
automatically 58
power key 1, 20
predictive text entry 46–49
privacy, call 29, 141
Q
quick dial
changing number(s) 58
using 51
quick note 93–94
defined 85
R
radio 80–82
received calls list 34, 36,
63–64
receiving a call 22
recent calls 63–64
redial
automatic redial 28–29
busy number 28
reminders
datebook 77
defined 103
text message 87
turning on/off 103
reminders (continued)
voicemail message 84
restricting calls 140–141
right soft key
customizing 125
functions 1, 23, 37
ring alert
creating ??–102
selecting 96
ring and vibrate ring style
indicator 25, 95
ring style
customizing 96–97
defined 95
indicators 25, 95
setting 95
ring style indicator
defined 25, 95
illustration 23
ring tone, setting sound file
as 90
ringer
volume, adjusting 25
volume, setting 97
ringer ID
activating/deactivating
96–97
defined 69, 96
listed in phonebook
entry 67
setting for phonebook
entry 69
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgbe.png)
185
PRELIMINARY
Index
roam indicator
defined 24
illustration 23
S
scroll feature 59
scroll keys 1, 37
secure connection 29, 141
security code
changing 137–138
send key 1, 21, 22
sending a call 21
short message service.
See text message
shortcuts
creating 104–105
standard 104
using 106
signal strength indicator
defined 24
illustration 23
silent alert indicator 25
silent ring style indicator
25, 95
SMS. See text message
soft keys
customizing 125
functions 23, 37
illustration 1
soft ring style indicator 25,
95
sound
downloading 114–115
setting as ring tone 90
storing a sound file
89–90
speakerphone, activating
36
speed dial
changing number 69
number, defined 31
sorting phonebook
entries by 73
using 31
standby time, increasing
27
storing a call 63–64
symbol text mode 45–46
symbols, entering 45–46
T
Talk Secure
feature 29,
141
tap method text entry
42–44
telephone number, viewing
your own 22, 54
text
block cursor 40
browse mode 41
character chart 44
entering from keypad
41–49
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgbf.png)
186
PRELIMINARY
Index
text (continued)
entry mode, changing
41
flashing cursor 40
iTAP software predictive
text entry 46–49
numeric mode 41
symbol chart 45
symbol mode 45–46
tap method 42–44
text message
defined 85
deleting 87–89
dialing number from 32
drafts folder 53
inbox setup 85–86
locking 87–89
outbox 52
quick note 93–94
reading 87–89
receiving 86–87
reminders 87
sending 32, 91–93
sound, storing 89–90
status 94
text mode, changing 41
Text Msg Menu
88–89
three-way call 35
time, setting 58
timers
described 65–66
resetting 66
viewing 66
travel charger, using 20
TTY device 126–127
U
unlock
keypad 56, 140
phone 139–140
unlock code 138
bypassing 138
changing 137–138
entering 21, 139, 140
V
vibrate alert
selecting 96
vibrate ring style
indicator 25, 95
setting 95
video poker 122–124
voice dial
dialing a number 34, 72
recording voice name
70–71
sending an email 72
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgc0.png)
187
PRELIMINARY
Index
voice key
dialing a number 34
functions 1
recording a voice name
71
recording a voice note
107
voice message waiting
indicator 23, 24, 84
voice name
defined 70
phonebook indicator 67
recording 70–71
voice notes 107–112
Voice Notes Menu
108
voice shortcut
creating 104–105
defined 104
using 106
voicemail
dialing with one-touch
dial 31
listening to message(s)
84
number, storing 83
receiving 84
reminders, turning on/off
103
volume
earpiece 25
keypad 97
ringer 25, 97
volume keys 1, 25
W
wait character 33
warranty 167–174
Web pages 113–114
Z
zoom setting 25, 59
U.S. patent Re. 34,976
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgc1.png)
188
PRELIMINARY
Index
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgc2.png)
✂
PRELIMINARY
189
Wireless Phone Safety
Tips
“Safety is your most important call!”
Your Motorola wireless telephone gives you
the powerful ability to communicate by voice—
almost anywhere, anytime, wherever wireless
phone service is available and safe conditions allow.
But an important responsibility accompanies the
benefits of wireless phones, one that every user
must uphold.
When driving a car, driving is your first
responsibility. If you find it necessary to use your
wireless phone while behind the wheel of a car,
practice good common sense and remember the
following tips:
1 Get to know your Motorola wireless phone and its
features such as speed dial and redial. If available,
these features help you to place your call without taking
your attention off the road.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgc3.png)
190
PRELIMINARY
2 When available, use a hands-free device. If possible,
add an additional layer of convenience to your wireless
phone with one of the many Motorola Original™
hands-free accessories available today.
3 Position your wireless phone within easy reach.
Be able to access your wireless phone without
removing your eyes from the road. If you receive an
incoming call at an inconvenient time, if possible, let
your voice mail answer it for you.
4 Let the person you are speaking with know you are
driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy
traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet,
snow, ice, and even heavy traffic can be hazardous.
5 If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient
time do not take notes or look up phone numbers
while driving. Jotting down a “to do” list or going
through your address book takes attention away from
your primary responsibility—driving safely.
6 Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible,
place calls when you are not moving or before
pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car will
be stationary. If you need to make a call while moving,
dial only a few numbers, check the road and your
mirrors, then continue.
7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional
conversations that may be distracting. Make people
you are talking with aware you are driving and suspend
conversations which have the potential to divert your
attention away from the road.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgc4.png)
191
PRELIMINARY
8 Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1
or other local emergency number in the case of fire,
traffic accident or medical emergencies.*
9 Use your wireless phone to help others in
emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in
progress or other serious emergency where lives
are in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency
number, as you would want others to do for you.*
10 Call roadside assistance or a special
non-emergency wireless assistance number when
necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing
no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor
traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a
vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance
or other special non-emergency wireless number.*
* Wherever wireless phone service is available.
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgc5.png)
192
PRELIMINARY
Check the laws and regulations on the use of
wireless telephones and their accessories in
the areas where you drive. Always obey
them. The use of these devices may be
prohibited or restricted in certain areas.
For more information,
please call
1-888-901-SAFE
or visit the
CTIA Web site at
www.wow-com.com™
ITC00-011
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgc6.png)
1
Welcome
Welcome to the world of Motorola digital wireless
communications! We are pleased that you have chosen the
Motorola V70 wireless phone.
Earpiece
Headset Jack
Insert headset
accessory for
hands-free use.
Volume Key
Adjust earpiece
and ringer volume.
Display
Accessory
Connector Port
Insert charger and
phone accessories.
Right Soft Key
Perform functions
identified by right
display prompt.
Menu Key
Power/End Key
Press & hold to power
phone on & off.
Press & release to end
phone calls,exit menu
system.
Send Key
Send and answer
calls, view recent
dialed calls list.
Navigation Keys
Scroll through
menus and lists,
set feature values.
Left Soft Key
Perform functions
identified by left
display prompt.
Microphone
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
2
Personal Communications Sector
600 North U.S. Highway 45
Libertyville, Illinois 60048
1-800-331-6456 (United States)
1-888-390-6456 (TTY/TDD United States)
1-800-461-4575 (Canada)
www.motorola.com
(United States)
www.motorola.ca
(Canada)
MOTOROLA, the Stylized M Logo and all other trademarks indicated as
such herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. ® Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off.
TrueSync, Sidekick, Starfish and the Stylized Starfish Logo are registered
trademarks of Starfish Software, Inc., a wholly owned independent
subsidiary of Motorola, Inc. All other product or service names are the
property of their respective owners.
© 2001 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
Software Copyright Notice
The Motorola products described in this manual may include
copyrighted Motorola and third party software stored in semiconductor
memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries
preserve for Motorola and third party software providers certain
exclusive rights for copyrighted software, such as the exclusive rights to
distribute or reproduce the copyrighted software. Accordingly, any
copyrighted software contained in the Motorola products may not be
modified, reverse-engineered, distributed, or reproduced in any manner
to the extent allowed by law. Furthermore, the purchase of the
Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by
implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights,
patents, or patent applications of Motorola or any third party software
provider, except for the normal, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use
that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Manual number:
Cover number:
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgc8.png)
✂
3
Menu Map
Main Menu
• Recent Calls
• Received Calls
• Dialed Calls
• Notepad
• Call Times
• Call Cost
• Service Dial
• Fixed Dial
• Phonebook
• Datebook
• Quick Dial
• Messages
• Voicemail
• Text Msgs
• Browser Alerts
• Info Services
• Quick Notes
• Outbox
• Drafts
• Shortcuts
• Voice Dial
• SIM Applications
• Browser
• Calculator
• Games
• Settings
(see next page)
Note:
This is the standard phone
menu layout. You or your service
provider may have changed the
menu layout or changed some
feature names. Not all features
may be available for all users.
Shortcuts
Change display zoom:
Press
M
, then press and
hold
M
Display my phone number:
Press
M
#
Go to dialed calls list:
Press
N
Exit menu system:
Press
O
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgc9.png)
✂
4
Settings Menu
• Ring/Vibrate
• Alert
•
Alert
Detail
• My Tones
• Call Forward
• Voice Calls
• Fax Calls
• Data Calls
• Cancel All
• Forward Status
• Phone Status
• My Tel. Numbers
• Credit Info/Available
• Active Line
• Battery Meter
• Other Information
• Browser Setup
• In-Call Setup
• In-Call Timer
• Call Cost Setup
• My Caller ID
• Talk and Fax
• Answer Options
• Call Waiting
• Security
• Phone Lock
• Lock Application
• Fixed Dial
• Call Barring
• SIM Pin
• New Passwords
• Other Settings
• Personalize
• Main Menu
• Keys
• Greeting
• Quick Dial
• Initial Setup
• Time and Date
• 1-Touch Dial
• Backlight
• Zoom
• Scroll
• Animation
• Language
• Battery Save
• Contrast
• DTMF
• Master Reset
• Master Clear
• Network
• Car Settings
• Headset
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgca.png)
5
Contents
Menu Map
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
About This Guide
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Safety and General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Getting Started
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
What’s in the Box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Installing the SIM Card and Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Turning Your Phone On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Sending a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Ending a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Receiving a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
About Your Phone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Changing the Zoom Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Adjusting Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Battery Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Sending and Receiving Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Redialing a Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using Automatic Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Line Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Returning an Unanswered Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Dialing an Emergency Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Entering Numbers in the Notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Terminating an Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Dialing With Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Dialing With 1-Touch Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgcb.png)
Contents
6
Dialing a Number in a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Additional Dialing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using Features While On a Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Making a Conference Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Transferring a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Additional On-Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Using the Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Navigating to a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Selecting a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Entering Feature Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Entering Text
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Choosing a Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Tap Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Symbol Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Predictive Text Entry with iTAP™ Software . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Menu Feature Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Recent Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Viewing the Received Calls or Dialed Calls List . . . . . . . . . 79
Using the Notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Viewing and Resetting Call Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Viewing and Resetting Call Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Phonebook
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fields in a Phonebook Entry Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Storing a Phonebook Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Recording a Voice Name For a Phonebook Entry . . . . . . . . 91
Dialing a Phonebook Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Editing a Phonebook Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Deleting a Phonebook Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgcc.png)
7
Contents
Copying Phonebook Entries Between the Phone and SIM Card
95
Checking Phonebook Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Synchronizing with TrueSync Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Setting Up the Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Datebook
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Week View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Day View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Event View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Storing a New Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Changing Event Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Copying an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Deleting an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Radio
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Turning the Radio On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Tuning a Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Storing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Selecting a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Sending and Receiving Calls With the Radio On . . . . . . . 109
Messages—Voicemail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Storing Your Voicemail Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Receiving a New Voicemail Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Listening to a Voicemail Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Messages—Text
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Setting Up the Text Message Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Receiving a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Reading, Locking, or Deleting a Text Message . . . . . . . . . 115
Sending a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Viewing the Status of Sent Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 119
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgcd.png)
Contents
8
Shortcuts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Standard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
User-Settable Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Creating a Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Using Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Micro-Browser
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Starting a Micro-Browser Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Interacting With Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Calculator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Calculating Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Converting Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Games
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Selecting and Starting a New Game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Ending a Game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Playing a Game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Adjusting Your Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Ring/Vibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Reordering Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Customizing a Soft Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Hands-Free Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Data and Fax Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Connecting Your Phone to an External Device . . . . . . . . 149
Sending a Data or Fax Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Receiving a Data or Fax Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Sending a Talk then Fax Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Security
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Assigning a New Code or Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgce.png)
9
Contents
If You Forget a Code or Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Locking and Unlocking Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Barring Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Protecting the SIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Product Registration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Export Law Assurances
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Specific Absorption Rate Data
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Wireless Phone Safety Tips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 9 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgcf.png)
10
About This Guide
Using Your Phone’s Features
This user guide introduces you to the many features in your
Motorola V70 phone. A reference guide for your phone is also
available that explains the phone’s features in more detail. To
obtain a copy of the reference guide or another copy of this user
guide, see the Motorola Web site at:
http://motorola.com/consumer/manuals
(United States)
http://www.motorola.ca/manuals
(Canada)
or contact the Motorola Customer Call Center at
1-800-331-6456 in the United States or 1-800-461-4575 in
Canada.
Navigating To a Menu Feature
You can access many of your phone’s features through the menu
system. This guide shows you how to navigate to a specific menu
feature as follows:
The > symbol means that you should scroll to and select the
feature. This example shows that you must press M
, scroll to
and select
Recent Calls
, then scroll to and select
Dialed Calls
to view the dialed calls list.
Find the Feature
M
>
Recent Calls
>
Dialed Calls
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 10 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgd0.png)
11
About This Guide
Optional Features
Features marked with this label are optional network,
SIM card, and/or subscription-dependent features.
These features may not be offered by all service
providers in all geographical areas. Contact your
service provider for information about availability.
Optional Accessories
Features marked with this label require the use of an
optional Motorola Original™ accessory.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 11 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgd1.png)
12
Safety and General
Information
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT
OPERATION. READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING YOUR
PHONE.
RF Operational Characteristics
Your phone contains a transmitter and a receiver. When it is ON,
it receives and transmits radio frequency (RF) energy. The phone
operates in the frequency range of xx through xx.
When you communicate with your phone, the system handling
your call controls the power levels at which your phone
transmits. The output power level typically may vary over a range
from xx watts to xx watts in analog mode and xx watts to xx
watts in digital mode.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Energy
Your Motorola phone is designed to comply with the following
national and international standards and guidelines regarding
exposure of human beings to radio frequency electromagnetic
energy (EME):
• United States Federal Communications Commission, Code
of Regulations; 47 CFR part 2 sub-part J
• American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of
Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95. 1-1992
• Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
C95.1-1999 Edition
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 12 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgd2.png)
13
Safety and General Information
• National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurements (NCRP) of the United States, Report 86,
1986
• International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection (ICNIRP) 1998
• Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6. Limits of Human
Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields in the
Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999
• Australian Communications Authority
Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic Radiation-Human
Exposure) Standard 1999
To assure optimal phone performance and make sure human
exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy is within the
guidelines set forth in the above standards, always adhere to the
following procedures:
Portable Phone Operation and EME
Exposure
Antenna Care
Use only the supplied or an approved replacement
antenna.
Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or
attachments could damage the phone and may violate FCC
regulations.
Do NOT hold the antenna when the phone is in use.
Holding the antenna affects call quality and may cause the
phone to operate at a higher power level than needed.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 13 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgd3.png)
Safety and General Information
14
Phone Operation
When placing or receiving a phone call, hold your phone as you
would a wireline telephone.
Speak directly into the
microphone.
Body-Worn Operation
To maintain compliance with FCC/Health Canada RF exposure
guidelines, if you wear a phone on your body when transmitting,
always place the phone in a Motorola-supplied or approved
clip, holder, holster, case, or body harness for this
product. Use of non-Motorola-approved accessories may
exceed FCC/Health Canada RF exposure guidelines. If you do
not use a body-worn accessory, and are not holding the
phone in the normal use position at the ear, ensure the
phone and its antenna are at least one inch
(2.5 centimeters) from your body when transmitting.
Data Operation
When using any data feature of the phone, with or without an
accessory cable, position the phone and its antenna at
least one inch (2.5 centimeters) from your body.
Approved Accessories
For a list of approved Motorola accessories, visit our website at
www.motorola.com
.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 14 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgd4.png)
15
Safety and General Information
Electromagnetic Interference/
Compatibility
Note: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to
electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded,
designed, or otherwise configured for electromagnetic
compatibility.
Facilities
To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility
conflicts, turn off your phone in any facility where posted notices
instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be
using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy.
Aircraft
When instructed to do so, turn off your phone when on board an
aircraft. Any use of a phone must be in accordance with
applicable regulations per airline crew instructions.
Medical Devices
Pacemakers
The Advanced Medical Technology Association recommends that
a minimum separation of 6 inches (15 centimeters) be
maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a
pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the
independent research by, and recommendations of, the United
States Food and Drug Administration.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 15 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgd5.png)
Safety and General Information
16
Persons with pacemakers should:
• ALWAYS keep the phone more than six inches
(15 centimeters) from your pacemaker when the phone is
turned ON.
• NOT carry the phone in the breast pocket.
• use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the
potential for interference.
• turn OFF the phone immediately if you have any reason to
suspect that interference is taking place.
Hearing Aids
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing
aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult
your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical device, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately
shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist
you in obtaining this information.
Safety and General
Use While Driving
Check the laws and regulations on the use of phones in the area
where you drive. Always obey them.
When using your phone while driving, please:
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 16 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgd6.png)
17
Safety and General Information
• give full attention to driving and to the road.
• use hands-free operation, if available.
• pull off the road and park before making or answering a
call if driving conditions so require.
Operational Warnings
For Vehicles With an Air Bag
Do not place a portable phone in the area over an air bag or in
the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If
a portable phone is placed in the air bag deployment area and
the air bag inflates, the phone may be propelled with great force
and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle.
Potentially Explosive Atmospheres
Turn off your phone prior to entering any area with a potentially
explosive atmosphere, unless the phone is a model specifically
identified as being “Intrinsically Safe.” Do not remove, install, or
charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive
atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily
injury or even death.
Note: The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres referred
to above include fueling areas such as below decks on boats,
fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, areas where the air
contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal
powders, and any other area where you would normally be
advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Areas with potentially
explosive atmospheres are often but not always posted.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 17 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgd7.png)
Safety and General Information
18
Blasting Caps and Areas
To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn OFF
your phone when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a
blasting area, or in areas posted: “Turn off two-way radio.” Obey
all signs and instructions.
Operational Cautions
Antennas
Do not use any portable phone that has a damaged
antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with your
skin, a minor burn can result.
Batteries
All batteries can cause property damage and/or bodily injury
such as burns if a conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or
beaded chains touches exposed terminals. The conductive
material may complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and
become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any charged battery,
particularly when placing it inside a pocket, purse, or other
container with metal objects.
ITC01-076
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 18 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgd8.png)
19
Getting Started
What’s in the Box?
Your digital wireless phone typically comes equipped with a
battery and a charger. Other accessory options can customize
your phone for maximum performance and portability.
To purchase Motorola Original™ accessories, please contact the
Motorola Customer Call Center at 1-800-331-6456 in the
United States or 1-800-461-4575 in Canada.
Installing the SIM Card and Battery
Before you can use your phone, you need to install and charge
the battery.
Your phone is designed to be used only with Motorola
Original batteries and accessories. We recommend that
you store batteries in their protective cases when not
in use.
Your SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card contains your phone
number, service details, and phonebook/message memory. It
must be installed in the base of the phone.
Caution: Do not bend or scratch your SIM card. Avoid exposing
your SIM card to static electricity, water, or dirt.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 19 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgd9.png)
Getting Started
20
Step
1
Remove the back cover
of the phone:
a
While pressing the
release button at
the bottom of the
cover, slide the
cover downward.
b
Pull the cover
away from the
base.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 20 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgda.png)
21
Getting Started
2
Insert the SIM card,
with the notch at the
upper right and the
gold plate downward,
into the SIM slot
(located above the
battery compartment).
When the SIM card is
properly positioned, the
battery compartment
terminals are visible.
3
Install the battery by
inserting the tabs at
the base of the battery
into the slots at the
bottom of the battery
compartment.
4
Push the battery down
and snap it into place.
5
Re-install the back
cover by aligning the
cover about 1/2 inch
down on base and
fitting the cover onto
the base.
Step
a
b
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 21 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgdb.png)
Getting Started
22
Charging the Battery
New batteries are shipped partially charged. Before you can use
your phone, you need to install and charge the battery, as
indicated by the following instructions. Some batteries perform
best after several full charge/discharge cycles.
6
Push down on the
cover while sliding it
upward into position.
Step
1
Plug the travel charger
into the phone with the
release tabs facing up.
2
Plug the other end of the travel charger into the
appropriate electrical outlet.
3
When your phone indicates that the battery is fully
charged (Charge Complete), press the release tab and
remove the travel charger.
Step
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 22 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgdc.png)
23
Getting Started
Note: When you charge the battery, the battery level indicator in
the upper right corner of the display shows how much of the
charging process is complete. See the “Battery Level Indicator”
item on page 29.
Turning Your Phone On
Step Result
1
Open your
phone
expose the keypad
2
Press and hold O
(the End/Power
key)
turn on your phone
End/
Power Key
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 23 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgdd.png)
Getting Started
24
3
If necessary, enter
your SIM card PIN
code and press
OK (J)
unlock your SIM card
Caution: If you enter an
incorrect PIN code three times in
a row, your SIM card is disabled
and your phone displays the
message SIM Blocked. (For more
information, see “Protecting the
SIM Card” on page 158.)
4
If necessary, enter
your four-digit unlock
code and press
OK (J)
unlock your phone
The unlock code is originally set
to 1234. (For more information,
see “Locking and Unlocking Your
Phone” on page 155.)
Step Result
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 24 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgde.png)
25
Getting Started
Sending a Call
To call a number, your phone:
• must be rotated completely open to expose the keypad
• must be turned on
• must have a SIM card inserted and unlocked
• must have a network connection with adequate signal
strength
Note: You can make an emergency call even when the phone is
locked, or when a SIM card is not inserted. See “Dialing an
Emergency Number” on page 38.
Ending a Call
Press To
1
keypad keys dial the phone number (up to 32
digits)
Tip: If you make a mistake, press
DELETE (L) to delete the last
digit, or press and hold
DELETE (L) to clear all digits.
2
N (send key) send the call
Press To
O (end key) end the call
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 25 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgdf.png)
Getting Started
26
Receiving a Call
To receive a call, your phone:
• must be rotated completely open to expose the keypad or
have a headset (an optional accessory) plugged in
• must be turned on
• must have a SIM card inserted and unlocked
• must have a network connection with adequate signal
strength
If your phone is locked, you must unlock it to answer the call.
Note: Your phone cannot receive calls when your SIM card is
locked.
When you receive a call, your phone rings and/or vibrates and
displays an incoming call message.
Displaying Your Phone Number
From the idle display:
Note: Your phone number must be programmed on your SIM
card in order to use this feature.
Press To
N or ANSWER (J) answer the call
Press To
M #see your phone number
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 26 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bge0.png)
27
About Your Phone
See page 1 for a diagram of your phone that describes basic
phone components.
Display
The top section of the display shows phone status indicators. The
following illustration shows some of the common indicators that
you may see at the top of the display when using your phone.
Messages, phone numbers, and menu options appear in the
middle of the display. Text labels at the bottom corners of the
display show the current soft key functions. A M (menu) indicator
in the bottom center of the display indicates that you can open
the main menu or a feature sub-menu to see more options. For
more information about the soft key and menu key labels, see
“Using the Menu” on page 49.
Some of the phone functions described in this guide must be
performed from the idle display. The term
idle display
refers to
the standard display that you see when your phone is on and
ready to use, when you are
not
on a call or using the menu
system.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 27 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bge1.png)
About Your Phone
28
➊ Signal Strength Indicator Shows the strength of your
phone’s connection with the network.
You cannot send or receive calls when the “no signal” indicator
is displayed.
➋ In Use Indicator Appears when a call is in progress.
➌ Roam Indicator Appears when your phone uses
another network system outside your home network.
When you leave your home network area, your phone
roams
or seeks another network.
Strong 5 4 3 2 1 j No signal
Ä
Alert
Setting
Indicator
➊
Signal
Strength
Indicator
➓
Clock
➏
Battery
Level
Indicator
➋
In Use
Indicator
➌
Roam
Indicator
➍
Message Waiting
Indicator
➎
Voice Message
Waiting Indicator
➑
GPRS Indicators
5O,=&E
w12:00 am
GPRS
e
P
é
➐
Active
line
indicator
➒
Menu Indicator
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 28 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bge2.png)
29
About Your Phone
➍ Message Waiting Indicator Appears when
your phone receives a text message.
➎ Voice Message Waiting Indicator Appears
when you receive a voicemail message.
➏ Battery Level Indicator Shows the amount of charge left
in your battery. The more segments visible, the greater the
charge.
Recharge your battery as soon as possible when you see the
Low Battery warning message.
Note: When you charge the battery, the battery level indicator
instead shows how much of the charging process is complete.
See “Charging the Battery” on page 22.
➐ Active Line Indicator When you use a SIM card
that supports dual phone lines, this indicator shows
the current active phone line. See the “Active
Line”option on page 69.
➑ GPRS Indicators Indicate that a GPRS packet
data connection is active. This type of connection may
be used by your service provider to allow faster data
transfer speeds. The GPRS indicators do not mean that
you are in a call; they simply indicates that you are registered on
the network via a GPRS connection.
High ED C B Empty
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 29 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bge3.png)
About Your Phone
30
➒ Menu Indicator Indicates that you can press M to open a
menu. See “Using the Menu” on page 49.
➓ Clock Shows the current time.
Ä Alert Setting Indicator Shows the current selected alert
profile. The default alert setting is a ringer.
Changing the Zoom Setting
You can set your phone’s display to show either three lines or
two lines of text plus soft key labels. Three lines of text display
more information, while two lines increase text size.
Note: By default, your phone uses two lines to display Chinese
characters. When your phone is set to display Chinese characters,
the zoom setting is not available.
To change the display view, press M once, then press and hold
M again within two seconds of the first press.
You can also adjust the zoom setting from the menu. See the
“Zoom” item on page 75.
w Loud ring x Soft ring
y Vibrate u Ring and vibrate
t Silent
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 30 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bge4.png)
31
About Your Phone
Adjusting Volume
You can adjust your phone’s earpiece and ringer volume:
You can increase or decrease
volume in two ways:
• use only the volume key
• use the volume key in
combination with the
up/down navigation
key
To change keypad volume, see “Customize an Alert Profile” on
page 134.
When You Can Adjust
you are in a call earpiece speaker volume
the idle display is showing ringer volume
Volume
Key
Up/Down
Navigation
Key
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 31 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bge5.png)
About Your Phone
32
Using Only the Volume Key
The volume key works in only one direction.
Using the Volume Key and the Up/Down
Navigation Key
To Increase Volume To Decrease Volume
Press the volume key
repeatedly.
Each press of the volume key
raises the volume one level. If
you press and hold the
volume key, the volume cycles
to the highest level and then
stops.
Press and hold the volume
key until the volume cycles to
and stops at the highest level.
Release the volume key, then
press again. The volume
begins at the lowest level and
adjusts upward as you
continue to press the key.
Step Result
1
Press the volume key
once
Your phone displays the volume
meter.
2
Press the up-arrow (on
the up/down
navigation key)
or
Press the down-arrow
(on the up/down
navigation key)
Volume increases.
Volume decreases.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 32 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bge6.png)
33
About Your Phone
Battery Use
Caution: To prevent injuries or burns, do not allow metal
objects to contact or short-circuit the battery terminals.
To maximize your battery’s performance:
• Always use Motorola Original™ batteries and battery
chargers. The phone warranty does not cover damage
caused from using non-Motorola batteries and/or battery
chargers.
• New batteries or batteries that have been stored for long
periods of time may require a longer charge time.
• Maintain the battery at or near room temperature when
charging.
• Do not expose batteries to temperatures below -10°C
(14°F) or above 45°C (113°F). Always take your phone with
you when you leave your vehicle.
• When you do not intend to use a battery for a while, store it
uncharged in a cool, dark, dry place, such as a refrigerator.
• Over extended periods of time, batteries gradually wear
down and require longer charging times. This is normal. If
you charge your battery regularly and notice a decrease in
talk time or an increase in charging time, then it is probably
time to purchase a new battery.
• The more you talk on the phone or use phone features (like
sending text messages), the less standby time your battery
has.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 33 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bge7.png)
About Your Phone
34
The rechargeable batteries that power this product
must be disposed of properly and may need to be
recycled. Refer to your battery’s label for battery type.
Contact your local recycling center for proper disposal methods.
Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 34 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bge8.png)
35
Sending and Receiving
Calls
This chapter describes features related to sending and receiving
calls.
For information about other call-related features, see “Recent
Calls” on page 79 and “Data and Fax Calls” on page 148. For
basic instructions on how to send, end, and receive a call, see
pages 25–26 of the “Getting Started” section.
Note: To send and receive calls, rotate your phone’s cover open.
Redialing a Number
You can redial a previously dialed phone number, whether the
call was connected or busy. From the idle display:
Using Automatic Redial
You must turn on automatic redial to use this feature. See the
“Auto Redial” item on page 75 to turn on automatic redial.
If you receive a busy signal, your phone displays Call Failed.
Press To
1
N go directly to the dialed calls list
2
Kscroll to the entry you want to call
3
N redial the highlighted number
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 35 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bge9.png)
Sending and Receiving Calls
36
When automatic redial is turned on, your phone automatically
makes a number of redial attempts until the call goes through.
When the call goes through, your phone rings or vibrates one
time, displays the message Redial Successful, and then
connects the call.
When automatic redial is turned off, you can manually activate
the feature to redial a phone number. When you hear a busy
signal and see the Call Failed message:
Caller ID
The
calling line identification
(caller ID) feature lets
you see who is calling before you answer.
• If the caller’s name is stored in your phonebook, the phone
automatically displays the name. Otherwise, the phone
displays the caller’s phone number.
• If caller ID information is not available, your phone displays
the message Incoming Call.
Press To
N or RETRY (J) activate automatic redial
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 36 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgea.png)
37
Sending and Receiving Calls
Line Security
If your phone displays Line Not Secure while you are on a call,
your phone has detected another device monitoring the call. This
message does not appear when caller ID, call cost, or other
information fills the display.
Returning an Unanswered Call
Your phone keeps a record of your unanswered calls. When you
cannot answer a call, your phone displays:
• the T (missed call) indicator
• the message
X
Missed Calls, where
X
is the total number
of missed calls
Press To
1
VIEW (J) see the received calls list, beginning
with the most recent call
2
K scroll through the list and select a call
that you want to return
3
N send the call
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 37 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgeb.png)
Sending and Receiving Calls
38
Dialing an Emergency Number
Your service provider programs one or more emergency phone
numbers (such as 112 or 911) that you can call under any
circumstances. You can dial and call the emergency number even
when your phone is locked, when you are prompted to enter a
code or password, when the SIM card is not inserted in your
phone, or when the SIM card is blocked or disabled.
Note: Emergency numbers vary by country. Your phone’s
emergency number(s) may not work in all locations.
To call the emergency number at any time:
Entering Numbers in the Notepad
Your phone stores the most recent string of digits entered on the
keypad in a temporary memory location called the
notepad
.
These digits can be the last phone number that you called, or a
phone number that you simply entered but did not call. These
digits remain in the notepad even when you turn off the phone.
You can use the notepad to store a phone number that you
intend to call later (such as a phone number told to you by the
other party during a call). To retrieve these digits, see “Using the
Notepad” on page 82.
Press To
1
keypad keys dial the emergency number (such as
112)
2
N call the emergency number
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 38 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgec.png)
39
Sending and Receiving Calls
Terminating an Incoming Call
While the phone is ringing or vibrating:
Depending on your phone settings and the type of
subscription you have, the call may be forwarded to
another number, or the caller may hear a busy signal.
Dialing With Speed Dial
Speed dial
lets you dial any phonebook entry with a minimal
number of keypresses.
When you store an entry in your phonebook, it is assigned a
unique speed dial number. You can then use the speed dial
feature to call the entry.
To make an entry in the phonebook or view an existing entry’s
speed dial number, see “Storing a Phonebook Entry” on
page 88.
Press To
O or IGNORE (L) cancel the incoming call
Press To
1
keypad keys enter the one-, two-, or three-digit
speed dial number for the entry you
want to dial
2
# submit the number
3
N call the entry
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 39 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bged.png)
Sending and Receiving Calls
40
Dialing With 1-Touch Dial
You can call phonebook entries 1 through 9 with the push of a
single key. Press and hold the one-digit speed dial number for
one second. To store entries in locations 1 through 9 in the
phonebook, see “Storing a Phonebook Entry” on page 88.
Note: You must specify which phone number list you want to
use with this feature: phone memory phonebook, or SIM card
phonebook. See “1-Touch Dial Preference” on page 101.
Dialing a Number in a Text Message
If you receive a text message with an embedded
phone number, you can dial the number directly.
Note: You must set up the text message inbox before
you can receive text messages. See “Setting Up the Text
Message Inbox” on page 113.
If the message contains more than one phone number, press K
to scroll to a number, then press SELECT (L) to dial.
Find the Feature
M> Messages > Text Msgs
Press To
1
K scroll to the message with the
number
2
M open the Text Msg Menu
3
K scroll to Call Back
4
SELECT (J) dial the number in the message
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 40 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgee.png)
41
Sending and Receiving Calls
Additional Dialing Features
In addition to pressing numbers on your keypad, you can insert
numbers or characters and send calls in a variety of ways.
To dial the local international access code:
While dialing (with digits visible in the display):
Do This To
Press 0 for two
seconds
insert the international access code
for the country from which you are
dialing
Do This To
Press M
> Attach Number
attach a number from the phonebook
or recent calls list to the end of the
digits you entered
Press M
> Hide ID/Show ID
Hide (or show) your caller ID for the
next call
Press M
> Send Message
create a text message addressed to
the number entered
Press M
> Talk Then Fax
talk and then send a fax to the same
phone number within the same call
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 41 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgef.png)
Sending and Receiving Calls
42
Press M and then
scroll to and select
one of the following:
•Insert Pause
(to insert a p)
•Insert Wait
(to insert a w)
•Insert 'n'
(to insert an n)
insert a special character when
making a call that requires you to dial
and send additional digits (for
example, to make a calling card call,
or to retrieve messages from an
answering machine):
•Pause tells your phone to wait
until the call connects before it
automatically sends the next
digit(s) in a series.
•Wait tells your phone to wait
until the call connects, and then
to prompt you for confirmation
before it sends the next digit(s).
•'n' tells your phone to prompt you
for a number before dialing the
call. The number you enter is
inserted into the dialing sequence
in place of the n character.
Do This To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 42 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgf0.png)
43
Sending and Receiving Calls
You can also call numbers using these features:
Do This To Call
Press V. Dial (L), and say
the entry’s name within two
seconds
a phone number using the
voice dial feature
See “Recording a Voice
Name For a Phonebook
Entry” on page 91.
Press M > Service Dial
>
entry to call
a service dial number
programmed on the SIM
card
Press M > Fixed Dial
>
entry to call
a fixed dial number
Press M > Recent Calls
>Received Calls
or
Dialed Calls
>
entry to call
a missed call or a number
from a call you recently
dialed or received
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 43 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgf1.png)
44
Using Features While On a
Call
Using Call Waiting
If you subscribe to call waiting, an alert tone sounds
while you are on a call to indicate that you have
received a second call.
To put the first call on hold and answer the second call:
To end the first call and answer the second call:
You must activate call waiting in order to use the feature. See the
“Call Waiting” item on page 72 to activate call waiting.
Press To
1
N answer the new call
2
SWITCH (J)
or
LINK (L)
switch back to the first call
Note: You can press SWITCH (J) at
any time to switch between calls.
connect the two calls
Press To
1
O end the current call
Your phone rings to signal the new
call.
2
N answer the new call
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 44 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgf2.png)
45
Using Features While On a Call
Making a Conference Call
To talk to more than one person on a call, you can
make a conference call. Call the first person, call the
second person, then link the two calls.
Press To
1
keypad keys dial the first person’s number
2
N call the number
3
HOLD (J)
(if available)
or
M > Hold
put the first call on hold
Your phone displays a l (flashing
phone) indicator next to the call on
hold.
4
keypad keys dial the next person’s number
5
N call the number
Your phone displays a W (active call)
indicator next to the new active call.
6
LINK (L) connect the two calls
7
O end the entire call
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 45 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgf3.png)
Using Features While On a Call
46
Transferring a Call
While you are on a call, you can transfer the call to another
phone by first talking to the person who answers the other
phone, or by directly transferring the call.
Announce the Call Transfer
You can talk to the person who answers the other phone before
you transfer the call, to tell them whom you are transferring.
Find the Feature
M > Hold
Press To
1
keypad keys enter the phone number where you
are transferring the call
2
N dial the phone number
Speak to the person who answers the
target phone.
3
M open the menu
4
K scroll to Transfer
5
SELECT (J) select Transfer
6
OK (J) confirm the transfer
Your phone displays the message
Transfer: Complete when the call
is transferred. You can hang up the
phone when you see this message.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 46 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgf4.png)
47
Using Features While On a Call
Do Not Announce the Call Transfer
You can directly transfer a call without talking to the person who
answers.
Find the Feature
M > Transfer
Press To
1
keypad keys enter the phone number where you
are transferring the call
2
N dial the phone number
Your phone displays the message
Transfer: Complete when the call
is transferred. You can hang up the
phone when you see this message.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 47 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgf5.png)
Using Features While On a Call
48
Additional On-Call Features
While you are on a call, you can perform the following tasks:
Do This To
Press HOLD (J) (if
available)
or
Press M > Hold
put a call on hold
Your phone displays a l
(flashing phone) indicator to
indicate that the call is on
hold.
Press M >
My Tel. Numbers
see your phone number
Press M > Send Tones send a number to the network
as DTMF tones, for credit card
calling or password entry
To activate DTMF tones, see
the “DTMF” item on page 76
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 48 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgf6.png)
49
Using the Menu
Navigating to a Feature
You can access many of your phone’s features by using these
keys to move through the menu system:
Volume Key
Adjust earpiece
and ringer volume.
Right Soft Key
Perform functions
identified by right
display prompt.
Menu Key
Power/End Key
Press & hold to power
phone on & off.
Press & release to end
phone calls,exit menu
system.
Send Key
Send and answer
calls, view recent
dialed calls list.
Navigation Keys
Scroll through
menus and lists,
set feature values.
Left Soft Key
Perform functions
identified by left
display prompt.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 49 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgf7.png)
Using the Menu
50
This guide shows how to navigate to a menu feature as follows:
The > symbol means that you should scroll to and select the
feature. This example shows that you should press M, scroll to
and select Recent Calls, then scroll to and select Dialed Calls
to see the dialed calls list.
Selecting a Feature
Some features require you to select an item from a list:
Select an item by highlighting it using one of these approaches:
• Press K to scroll up or down to the item you want.
• In a numbered list, press a number key to highlight the
item.
• In an alphabetized list, press a key multiple times to cycle
through the letters on the key and highlight the closest
matching list item.
Find the Feature
M > Recent Calls
> Dialed Calls
Press
BACK
(
L
)
to return to
the previous
screen.
A sub-menu is
available. Press
M
to open
the sub-menu.
Highlighted
item
M
Press
VIEW
(
J
)
to view details
of the highlighted
item.
STORE
(
J
)
appears if you can
store the item in
your phonebook.
Dialed Calls
10) John Smith
9) Mary Smith
BACK VIEW
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 50 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgf8.png)
51
Using the Menu
Entering Feature Information
Features such as the phonebook and datebook require you to
enter information to fill in an entry’s details:
• Enter numbers or text with the keypad. (See “Entering Text”
on page 53.)
• When an item has a list of possible values, press * to
scroll left or # to scroll right, and select a value.
• When an item has a list of possible numeric values, press a
number key to set the value.
• If you enter or edit information and then decide that you do
not want to save your changes, press O to exit without
saving.
Press
CANCEL
(
L
) to
exit without making
changes.
DONE
(
L
) appears
when you enter or edit
information. Press
DONE
(
L
) to save
your changes.
Press
K
to
scroll down
to additional
items.
Press
CHANGE
(
J
)
to edit the selected
information.
Highlighted item
Entry Details
Name: John Smith
No.: 2125551212
CANCEL M CHANGE
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 51 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgf9.png)
Using the Menu
52
The message center lets you compose and send text messages.
(See “Entering Text” on page 53.) A
flashing cursor
shows you
where the text will appear:
When you enter text, the flashing cursor changes to a
block
cursor
, and the soft key functions change:
Press
BROWSE
(
J
)
to view and
insert a name,
number, or
message from
previously
stored
information.
Press
CANCEL
(
L
)
to exit without
making changes.
Flashing
cursor
indicates
insertion
point.
Press
M
to open the
sub-menu.
Msg:
______________
______________
CANCEL M
BROWSE
|
Press
OK
(
J
)
to accept and
store the text.
Press
DELETE
(
L
)
to delete the
character to the
left of the
insertion point.
Block
cursor
indicates
current
highlighted
character.
After two
seconds, the
block
cursor reverts to a
flashing cursor
and moves to the next
position.
Msg:
T_____________
______________
DELETE M
OK
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 52 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgfa.png)
53
Entering Text
Various text entry methods make it easy for you to enter names,
numbers, and text messages on your phone.
You can enter all characters (letters, numbers, and symbols)
using the standard tap method. Other text modes let you easily
enter numbers and symbols, or insert text already stored on your
phone. Finally, a predictive text mode lets you enter text
messages with a minimum of keypresses.
Choosing a Text Mode
To activate a text mode, press M
from any text entry screen
and select the text mode from the
Entry Method
menu:
Note:
The text mode you select remains active until you change
it by selecting another mode.
iTAP
Let the phone predict each word as you enter it,
then choose the word from a list (see “Predictive
Text Entry with iTAP™ Software” on page 58).
Tap Method
Enter characters one at a time by pressing the
key for the letter, number, or symbol (see “Tap
Method” on page 54). This is the standard mode
for entering text on your phone.
Numeric
Enter only the number that appears on each key.
Symbol
Enter symbols only (see “Symbol Mode” on
page 57).
Browse
Browse through your phonebook and recent
calls lists to select a name or number to enter.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 53 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgfb.png)
Entering Text
54
Tap Method
Tap method is the default standard mode for entering text on
your phone.
To activate tap method from any text entry screen, press M
and select the
Tap Method
menu option.
To enter text using the tap method:
Do This To
1
Press a number
key one or more
times
cycle through the characters
associated with the key and select
the character you want (see the
“Character Chart” on page 56).
2
Continue to press
number keys
enter the rest of the characters in the
text message
3
Press
OK
(J
) accept and store the text when you
are finished
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 54 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgfc.png)
55
Entering Text
General Text Entry Rules
Use the keypad to enter letters, numbers, symbols, and other
characters with the tap method. Press the same key repeatedly
to cycle through available characters. (See the “Character Chart”
on page 56.)
• If you do not press a key for two seconds, the character in
the block cursor is accepted, and the cursor moves to the
next position.
Press a number
key to enter text
at flashing cursor
location.
Press a number
key as many times
as necessary to
enter the desired
character.
Press and hold
a number key to
cycle between
tap method and
numeric text
entry mode.
Press left or
right navigation
keys to move
flashing cursor
to the left or
right in text
message.
Press up or
down navigation
keys to change
character in
block cursor to
uppercase or
lowercase.
Msg:
__________
__________
CANCEL M
BROWSE
|
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 55 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgfd.png)
Entering Text
56
• The first character of each sentence is capitalized unless you
manually change it. (Press K
down to force the character to
lowercase while it is highlighted by the block cursor.)
Character Chart
Use this chart as a guide for entering spaces, numbers, letters,
symbols, and other characters with the tap method.
Note:
Your phone model may not include all of the characters
shown in the above chart.
1
space . 1 ? ! , @ _ & ~ : ; " - ( ) '
¿ ¡ % £ $ ¥
€
2
A B C 2 Ä Å Á À Â Ã
α
β
Ç
a b c 2 ä å á à ã
α
β
ç
3
D E F 3
∆
Ë É È Ê
φ
d e f 3
δ
é è ê
φ
4
G H I 4 Ï Í Î ¬
g h i 4 ï í î
γ
5
J K L 5
Λ
j k l 5
λ
6
M N O 6 Ñ ö Ø ó ò ô õ
Ω
m n o 6 ñ ö ø ó ò ô õ
ω
7
P Q R S 7
∏
β
∑
p q r s 7
π
β
σ
8
T U V 8
θ
Ü Ú Ù Û
t u v 8
θ
ü ú ù
9
W X Y Z 9
Ξ
ψ
w x y z 9
ξ
ψ
0
+ - 0 x * / \ [ ] = > < # §
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 56 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgfe.png)
57
Entering Text
Symbol Mode
Your phone provides an alternate way to find and enter symbol
characters in a text message. You can view and select from a
variety of available symbols.
To activate symbol mode from any text entry screen, press M
and select the
Symbol menu option.
To enter a symbol in symbol mode:
Do This To
1
Press a number key
one time
display its symbol options (see the
“Symbol Chart” on page 58)
The symbols associated with the
key you pressed are shown at the
bottom of the display. If necessary,
press other keypad keys to find the
symbol you want.
2
Press the scroll
left * or the
scroll right # key
or
Press the number
key multiple times
highlight the symbol you want
3
Press SELECT (J) add the highlighted symbol to the
text area at the top of the display
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 57 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bgff.png)
Entering Text
58
Symbol Chart
Use this chart as a guide for entering symbols in symbol mode.
Predictive Text Entry with iTAP™
Software
iTAP™ software provides a predictive text entry method that lets
you enter the letters of a word using only one keypress per letter.
You must activate iTAP software prior to entering letters. You can
do this from any text entry screen by pressing M to open the
Entry Method menu and selecting the iTAP menu option.
1
space
. ? ! , @ _ & : ; " - ( ) ' ¿
¡ % £ $ ¥ €
2 @ _ \
3 / : ;
4 " & '
5 ( ) [ ] { }
6 ¿ ¡ ~
7 < > =
8 $ £ ¥ €
9 # % *
0 + - x * / =
> < # §
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 58 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg100.png)
59
Entering Text
Enter Words
To enter a word with iTAP software:
Do This To
1
Press a number key
one time
enter the first letter of the word
The letters associated with the key
you pressed are shown at the
bottom of the display.
2
Press number keys
(one per letter)
enter the rest of the word
Alternative words and letter
combinations are shown at the
bottom of the display based on the
keys you press. These word choices
are updated with each keypress.
3
When you have
entered all the
letters of the word,
press K
locate and highlight the word you
want
4
Press SELECT (J) add the highlighted word to the
text area at the top of the display
A space is automatically inserted
after the word.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 59 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg101.png)
Entering Text
60
For example, to spell the word “act,” press 2 2 8. The
display shows:
Enter Novel Words
You may enter a word that is not in the iTAP software dictionary.
If you enter all the letters of a word but the word is not
displayed:
Do This To
1
Press DELETE (L)
one or more times
delete one or more letters until
you see a letter combination
that matches the start of the
word
2
Press the scroll
left * or the
scroll right # key
highlight the letter or letter
combination
Press
SELECT
(
J
)
to insert the
highlighted word
at the insertion point.
Press
DELETE
(
L
)
t
o clear the last letter
entered.
Flashing
cursor
indicates
insertion
point.
Press
* and #
scroll and see
additional word
choices.
Cat Act Bat Abu
______________
______________
DELETE M
|
SELECT
}
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 60 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg102.png)
61
Entering Text
Punctuation
The iTAP software automatically adds a space after each word.
When you enter punctuation, this space is removed. To enter
punctuation with iTAP software:
Capitalization
The first word of a sentence is automatically capitalized, with
following words in lowercase. To set or adjust character
capitalization with iTAP software:
3
Press
SELECT
(J
),
then press the scroll
left *
key
shift the text entry cursor to the
left and “lock” the selected
portion of the word
4
Continue entering
letters and highlighting
letter combinations
spell the word
Press To
1
or 0
enter punctuation or other characters
as shown in the “Character Chart”
on page 56
Press To
K
up or down change the words to initial character
capitalized, all uppercase characters,
or all lowercase characters
Do This To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 61 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg103.png)
Entering Text
62
Enter Numbers
To enter a number with iTAP software:
Delete Letters and Words
Place the cursor to the right of the text that you want to delete,
and then:
Do This To
1
Enter the first digit
and then highlight it
put the iTAP software in number
entry mode
2
Press number keys add digits to the number
3
Press
SELECT
(J
) enter the number at the insertion
point
Do This To
Press
DELETE
(L
) delete one letter at a time
Continue to hold
DELETE
(L
)
delete the entire message
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 62 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg104.png)
63
Menu Feature Descriptions
This chapter describes all of your phone’s features in order of the
menu map shown on pages 3–4. Some descriptions also include
page numbers where you can find more detailed information.
If you would like to learn more about a specific feature, a
reference guide for your phone is also available. To obtain a copy
of the reference guide or another copy of this user guide, see the
Motorola Web site at:
http://motorola.com/consumer/manuals
(United States)
http://www.motorola.ca/manuals
(Canada)
or contact the Motorola Customer Call Center at
1-800-331-6456 (United States) or 1-800-461-4575 (Canada).
Main Menu
R
ECENT
C
ALLS
Received Calls
M
>
Recent Calls
>
Received Calls
View a list of recently received calls. See “Viewing the
Received Calls or Dialed Calls List” on page 79.
Dialed Calls
M
>
Recent Calls
>
Dialed Calls
View a list of recently dialed calls. See “Viewing the
Received Calls or Dialed Calls List” on page 79.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 63 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg105.png)
Menu Feature Descriptions
64
Notepad
M > Recent Calls
> Notepad
Call or store the last number entered on the keypad. See
“Entering Numbers in the Notepad” on page 38, and
“Using the Notepad” on page 82.
Call Times
M > Recent Calls
> Call Times
View call timers that track time spent on your last call,
dialed calls, received calls, all calls since reset, and all calls
total. See “Viewing and Resetting Call Timers” on page 83.
Call Cost
M > Recent Calls
> Call Cost
View call cost information. Your network may
provide current credit information, and can provide cost
information about the amount spent on your last call,
dialed calls, received calls, and all calls total. See “Viewing
and Resetting Call Costs” on page 85.
S
ERVICE
D
IAL
M > Service Dial
Dial pre-programmed numbers stored on your SIM
card. Your service provider can program your SIM
card with phone numbers for services such as taxi
companies, restaurants, and hospitals.
F
IXED
D
IAL
M > Fixed Dial
Dial or edit numbers in the fixed dial list.
When you activate the fixed dial feature, users can
only call the numbers in the fixed dial list. To activate fixed
dial, see the “Fixed Dial” item on page 73.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 64 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg106.png)
65
Menu Feature Descriptions
Fixed dial list entries can be any length. If there is a fixed
dial entry for the digits 555, users can call any number that
starts with 555.
You must enter your SIM PIN2 code to edit fixed dial
entries. In the fixed dial list, you can create, edit, delete, and
sort entries just like in the phonebook list. Fixed dial list
entries are stored on your SIM card and do not have Type
or Voice Name fields.
Note: Employers can use fixed dial to limit employees’
phones to a predefined list of numbers, country codes, or
other prefixes.
P
HONEBOOK
M > Phonebook
Store names and numbers as entries in your phonebook,
then call numbers by selecting them from the phonebook
list. See “Phonebook” on page 87.
D
ATEBOOK
M > Datebook
Use the datebook calendar to schedule and review your
appointments. See “Datebook” on page 102.
Q
UICK
D
IAL
M > Quick Dial
Dial pre-programmed numbers stored on your
phone. Your service provider may program your
phone with one or more quick dial numbers, such as the
customer service number. You can call them by selecting
them from the quick dial list.
Note: Your service provider may use a different name for
this feature.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 65 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg107.png)
Menu Feature Descriptions
66
M
ESSAGES
M > Messages
Adjust message settings, view and manage the
various types of messages your phone can receive
and/or send:
S
HORTCUTS
M > Shortcuts
Create keypad shortcuts to menu features. See “Shortcuts”
on page 120.
Voicemail Listen to your recorded voice
messages. See “Messages—
Voicemail” on page 111
Text Msgs Send and receive text messages. See
“Messages—Text” on page 113
Browser Alerts Read alert messages received by your
micro-browser
Info Services Read information services messages
(subscription-based broadcast
messages, such as stock updates,
news, and weather reports) that you
have received
Quick Notes Select and send pre-written messages
from the quick notes list.
Outbox View all outgoing text messages,
delivered and undelivered
Drafts Store and edit text messages that you
have written but not sent
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 66 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg108.png)
67
Menu Feature Descriptions
V
OICE
D
IAL
M > Voice Dial
Dial a phonebook entry by saying the pre-recorded voice
name for that phonebook entry. See “Voice Dial Using the
Menu” on page 93.
SIM A
PPLICATIONS
M > SIM Applications
Access information and applications stored on
your SIM card.
Your SIM card may contain applications that process your
outgoing calls, text messages, and other events. Contact
your service provider for details.
B
ROWSER
M > Browser
Access Web pages and run Web-based
applications. The micro-browser delivers WAP
(Wireless Application Protocol) pages from your service
provider directly to your phone. See “Micro-Browser” on
page 123.
C
ALCULATOR
M > Calculator
Use your phone as a calculator or currency converter. See
“Calculator” on page 125.
G
AMES
M > Games
Play games on your phone. See “Games” on page 128.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 67 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg109.png)
Menu Feature Descriptions
68
Settings Menu
R
ING
/V
IBRATE
Alert
M > Settings
> Ring/Vibrate
> Alert
Select a ring or vibration alert profile for incoming calls and
messages. See “Ring/Vibrate” on page 133.
Alert Detail
M > Settings
> Ring/Vibrate
>
Alert
Detail
Change details about the current alert profile.
Alert
represents the name of the alert profile. See
“Ring/Vibrate” on page 133.
My Tones
M > Settings
> Ring/Vibrate
> My Tones
Create custom alert tones for your phone. See “Use the My
Tones Feature” on page 135.
C
ALL
F
ORWARD
M > Settings
> Call Forward
Set options for forwarding incoming voice, data,
and/or fax calls to another phone number. See “Call
Forwarding” on page 141.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 68 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg10a.png)
69
Menu Feature Descriptions
P
HONE
S
TATUS
My Tel. Numbers
M > Settings
> Phone Status
> My Tel. Numbers
View, enter, and edit information about your name
and phone number.
Credit Info
M > Settings
> Phone Status
> Credit Info
View the credit available, its expiration date, and
the date of the last deposit. (This feature is available only if
you subscribe to a prepay option.)
Credit Available
M > Settings
> Phone Status
> Credit Available
View the credit available. (This feature is available
only if you subscribe to the advice-of-charge feature.)
Active Line
M > Settings
> Phone Status
> Active Line
Change the active phone line to send and receive
calls from either of the available numbers. (This feature is
available only for dual-line enabled SIM cards.)
Battery Meter
M > Settings
> Phone Status
> Battery Meter
View a detailed battery charge meter.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 69 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg10b.png)
Menu Feature Descriptions
70
Other Information
M > Settings
> Phone Status
> Other Information
View your phone’s feature specifications (if available from
the service provider).
B
ROWSER
S
ETUP
M > Settings
> Browser Setup
Adjust the micro-browser’s network connection
settings, or create a new network connection profile.
I
N-
C
ALL
S
ETUP
Set the features that are active during a call, such as the
in-call timer, call waiting, and call answering options.
In-Call Timer
M > Settings
> In-Call Setup
> In-Call Timer
Adjust call timer display and beep settings. You can set your
timer to beep at a selected interval during your calls. (60
seconds is the default.) You can also turn on or off a display
timer during calls as follows:
Time Display the elapsed time for the
current call
Cost Display the cost of the current
call (if you subscribe to a call
cost option or
advice-of-charge)
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 70 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg10c.png)
71
Menu Feature Descriptions
Call Cost Setup
M > Settings
> In-Call Setup
> Call Cost Setup
Adjust call cost settings.
You can assign a credit limit so that your phone displays
your remaining credit during calls. Your phone notifies you
when you approach your limit, and ends the call when you
reach it.
Your phone network expresses cost in the amount of units
used, but this feature lets you tell your phone how to
translate the units to a currency.
My Caller ID
M > Settings
> In-Call Setup
> My Caller ID
Activate and deactivate the display of your phone
number as an ID when you call someone.
Total Cost Display the cost of all calls
since the last time you reset
the timer (if you subscribe to
a call cost option or
advice-of-charge)
Credit Available Display how much credit you
have left (if you subscribe to a
call cost option or
advice-of-charge)
Off No in-call timer display
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 71 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg10d.png)
Menu Feature Descriptions
72
Talk and Fax
M > Settings
> In-Call Setup
> Talk and Fax
Activate and deactivate the talk/fax service.
Use this feature prior to making a call when you want to
talk and then send or receive a fax—all to the same phone
number and within the same call.
You can also use the talk then fax feature to send a fax
during a call. See “Sending a Talk then Fax Call” on
page 152.
Answer Options
M > Settings
> In-Call Setup
> Answer Options
Turn call answering options on or off:
Call Waiting
M > Settings
> In-Call Setup
> Call Waiting
Activate and deactivate call waiting.
When call waiting is activated and another call arrives while
you are on a call, call waiting can play a tone to notify you
of the new call. See “Using Call Waiting” on page 44.
Multi-Key Answer by pressing any key
Open to Answer Answer by opening the flip
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 72 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg10e.png)
73
Menu Feature Descriptions
S
ECURITY
Phone Lock
M > Settings > Security
> Phone Lock
Lock and unlock your phone. See “Locking and Unlocking
Your Phone” on page 155.
Lock Application
M > Settings > Security
> Lock Application
Lock and unlock specific phone applications (such as
phonebook or datebook). When an application is locked,
users must enter the unlock code to use the application.
Fixed Dial
M > Settings
> Security
> Fixed Dial
Restrict outgoing calls to numbers on the fixed
dial list. See “Fixed Dial” on page 64.
Call Barring
M > Settings > Security
> Call Barring
Restrict incoming and outgoing calls. See “Barring Calls”
on page 157.
SIM PIN
M > Settings > Security
> SIM PIN
Switch SIM card protection on and off, so users must enter
the SIM card PIN code when they turn on the phone or
insert a SIM card. See “Protecting the SIM Card” on
page 158.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 73 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg10f.png)
Menu Feature Descriptions
74
New Passwords
M > Settings > Security
> New Passwords
Change your unlock code (originally set to 1234) or your
security code (originally set to 000000). See “Assigning a
New Code or Password” on page 153.
O
THER
S
ETTINGS
Personalize
M > Settings
> Other Settings
> Personalize
Set several personal phone options:
Initial Setup
M > Settings
> Other Settings
> Initial Setup
Set many basic phone options:
Main Menu Change the order of the main menu.
(See “Reordering Menu Items” on
page 143.)
Keys Change the functions of the soft keys
in the idle display. (See “Customizing
a Soft Key Function” on page 144.)
Greeting Change the text displayed
when you turn on your phone
Quick Dial Change quick dial number(s)
Time and Date Set the phone’s time and date
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 74 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg110.png)
75
Menu Feature Descriptions
1-Touch Dial Assign the 1-touch dial feature to
numbers 1 through 9 in your phone
memory phonebook or SIM card
phonebook. (See “1-Touch Dial
Preference” on page 101.)
Auto Redial Use this option to turn on or turn off
the automatic redial feature. When
you turn on automatic redial, your
phone automatically redials calls that
fail due to busy conditions. (See
“Using Automatic Redial” on
page 35.)
Backlight Set the amount of time that the
display backlight remains on, or turn
off the backlight to conserve battery
power
Zoom Switch between three lines (Zoom
Out) and two lines (Zoom In) of display
text
Note: By default, your phone uses
two lines to display Chinese
characters. When your phone is set to
display Chinese characters, the zoom
setting is not available.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 75 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg111.png)
Menu Feature Descriptions
76
Scroll Force the cursor to stop or wrap
around when it reaches the top or
bottom of a list in the display
Animation Turn animation off (to conserve the
battery) or on. Animation makes your
phone’s menus move smoothly as you
scroll up and down.
Language Set the language for phone menus
Battery Save Adjust the phone’s power usage
characteristics to conserve power
Contrast Adjust the contrast setting for your
display
DTMF Your phone can send a number to the
network as dual tone multi-frequency
(DTMF) tones. DTMF tones are used to
communicate with automated systems
that require you to enter a number
such as a code, password, or credit
card number. Use this option to set
DTMF tones to be long, short, or off.
Master Reset Reset all options back to their original
factory settings
except
for the unlock
code, security code, and lifetime timer
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 76 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg112.png)
77
Menu Feature Descriptions
Network
M > Settings
> Other Settings
> Network
View and adjust your phone’s network settings.
Your service provider registers your phone to a network. You
can view information about the current network, change
how your phone searches for a network, specify your
preferred networks, and activate alerts that indicate when a
call is dropped or network registration changes.
Car Settings
M > Settings
> Other Settings
> Car Settings
Adjust hands-free car kit settings.
You can set your phone to route calls directly to the
Easy-Install Hands-Free Kit when it detects a connection,
and automatically answer calls after two rings. See
“Hands-Free Use” on page 144.
Master Clear Reset all options back to their original
factory settings
except
for the unlock
code, security code, and lifetime timer,
and
clear all user settings and entries
Note: This option
erases all
user-entered information
stored in
your phone’s memory, including
phonebook and datebook entries.
Once you erase the information, it
cannot be recovered.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 77 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg113.png)
Menu Feature Descriptions
78
Note: The use of wireless devices and their accessories may
be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. Always obey the
laws and regulations on the use of these products.
Headset
M > Settings
> Other Settings
> Headset
Set your phone to automatically answer calls after
two rings when connected to a headset. See “Hands-Free
Use” on page 144.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 78 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg114.png)
79
Recent Calls
You can use the recent calls menu to view received calls or dialed
calls, retrieve the last number stored in the notepad, and view or
reset call times and costs.
Viewing the Received Calls or Dialed
Calls List
Your phone keeps lists of the numbers from calls you recently
received and dialed, even if the calls did not connect. The lists
are sorted from newest to oldest entries. The oldest entries are
deleted as new ones are added. Each entry tells you the person’s
number (or name, if available) and whether the call connected or
not. You can call, store, or delete the numbers on these lists.
Shortcut: Press N to go directly to the dialed calls list from
the idle display.
To open the recent calls menu:
Find the Feature
M> Recent Calls
Press To
1
K scroll to Received Calls or
Dialed Calls
2
SELECT (J) select Received Calls or
Dialed Calls
3
K scroll to an entry you want to call,
store, or delete
Note: < means the call connected.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 79 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg115.png)
Recent Calls
80
The Last Calls Menu includes the following options:
4
N call the entry’s number
Tip: Press and hold N for two
seconds to send the entry number as
DTMF tones. To activate DTMF tones,
see the “DTMF” item on page 76.
or
J if View appears above the J key—
view the entry’s details
if Store appears above the J
key—store the entry’s details in the
phonebook
or
M open the Last Calls Menu to
perform other procedures as
described in the following list
Option Description
Store Create a phonebook entry with the
selected number in the No. field. (This
option does not appear if STORE appears
above the J key, or if the number is
already stored as a phonebook entry.)
Delete Delete the entry. (This option does not
appear if DELETE appears above the J
key.)
Press To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 80 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg116.png)
81
Recent Calls
Delete All Delete all entries in the current list.
Hide ID/Show ID Hide (or show) your caller ID for the next
call.
Send Message Create a new text message, with the
selected number in the Tel No. field. See
“Sending a Text Message” on page 117.
Add Digits Add digits to the end of the selected
number.
Attach Number Attach another number from the
phonebook or recent calls list to the end of
the selected number.
Send Tones Send the selected number to the network
as DTMF tones, for credit card calling or
password entry. (This option is available
only during an active call.)
To activate DTMF tones, see the “DTMF”
item on page 76.
Talk then Fax Tell the network you want to call and talk
to someone, and then send a fax—all to
the same number in the same call. See
“Sending a Talk then Fax Call” on
page 152.
Option Description
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 81 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg117.png)
Recent Calls
82
Using the Notepad
Your phone uses a notepad to store the most recent string of
digits entered—either for a phone number that you called or for
a number that you entered but did not call.
To call the number, create a phonebook entry, or perform other
operations with the number stored in the notepad:
Find the Feature
M > Recent Calls > Notepad
Press To
N
or
M
or
STORE (J)
call the number
open the Dialing Menu (to attach a
number or insert a special character)
See “Additional Dialing Features” on
page 41.
create a new phonebook entry, with
the notepad number copied into the
No. field.
See “Storing a Phonebook Entry” on
page 88.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 82 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg118.png)
83
Recent Calls
Viewing and Resetting Call Timers
Your phone tracks and records call times. Use the recent calls
menu to view and reset a call timer.
Network connection time
is the elapsed time from the moment
you connect to your service provider’s network to the moment
you end the call by pressing O. This time includes busy signals
and ringing.
The amount of network connection time you track on
your resettable timer may not equal the amount of time
for which you are billed by your service provider. For
billing information, please contact your service provider
directly.
You can view the approximate network connection time elapsed
during the following calls:
Timer Description
Last Call Time spent on the last call dialed or
received. You cannot reset this timer.
Dialed Calls Total time spent on dialed calls since the
last time you reset this timer.
Received Calls Total time spent on calls received since the
last time you reset this timer.
All Calls Total time spent on dialed and received
calls since the last time you reset this
timer.
Lifetime Total time spent on all calls on this phone.
You cannot reset this timer.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 83 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg119.png)
Recent Calls
84
To view a call timer:
To reset the call timer:
Find the Feature
M > Recent Calls
> Call Times
Press To
1
K scroll to the timer you want to view
2
SELECT (J) view the recorded time
Press To
1
RESET (J) reset the time (if available)
2
YES (L) confirm the reset
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 84 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg11a.png)
85
Recent Calls
Viewing and Resetting Call Costs
Your phone network can provide the following cost
information:
Cost Tracker Description
Credit
Available
Amount of your credit remaining.
For GSM advice-of-charge, this is only
available if you set a credit limit.
Note: Your phone receives cost
information from the advice-of-charge
feature or third-party prepay software.
Expiration Date Date that the available credit expires
(available only with a subscription to a
prepay option).
Last Deposit Amount of the last deposit (available only
with a subscription to a prepay option).
Last Call Amount spent on the last call you dialed
or received. You cannot reset this cost
tracker.
Dialed Calls Amount spent on calls you dialed since the
last time you reset this cost tracker.
Received Calls Amount spent on calls you received since
the last time you reset this cost tracker.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 85 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg11b.png)
Recent Calls
86
To view a cost tracker:
To reset the cost tracker:
All Calls Amount spent on all dialed and received
calls since the last time you reset this cost
tracker.
You can reset this value separate from
Dialed Calls and Received Calls, so
Dialed Calls plus Received Calls may
not equal All Calls.
Find the Feature
M > Recent Calls
> Call Cost
Press To
1
K scroll to the cost tracker you want to
view
2
SELECT (J) view the recorded cost
Press To
1
RESET (J) reset the cost (if available)
2
OK (L) enter your PIN2 code to confirm the
reset
Cost Tracker Description
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 86 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg11c.png)
87
Phonebook
You can store a list of names and phone numbers in your
phone’s electronic phonebook. You can view these entries and
call them directly from your phone.
To see the list of names stored in your phonebook, press
M > Phonebook from the idle display. Scroll to a name and
press VIEW (J) to view details of the phonebook entry as
shown in the following display.
Fields in a Phonebook Entry Form
Note: Phonebook entries stored on the SIM card do not have
Type or Voice Name information.
$*Carlo Emrys
2154337215
Speed No. 15
BACK M EDIT
Entry’s phone
number
Type
indicator
identifies
number type:
$
Work
U
Home
S
Main
h
Mobile
Z
Fax
p
Pager
Voice Name
indicator
indicates a recorded voice name Entry’s
Name
Edit
entry
Press
M
to open
the
Phonebook
Menu
Return
to list
Entry’s speed
dial number
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 87 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg11d.png)
Phonebook
88
Storing a Phonebook Entry
A phone number is required for a phonebook entry. All other
information is optional.
You can store a phonebook entry on your phone or on the
SIM card. Entries with a speed dial number from 1 to 500 are
stored on the phone. To store a phonebook entry on your SIM
card, assign a speed dial number of 501 or higher to the entry
when you create it. The total number of entries you can store on
the SIM card is dependent on your service provider.
Shortcut: Enter a phone number in the idle display, then press
STORE (J) to create a phonebook entry with the number in the
No. field. Go directly to step 1 in the following procedure to
enter additional information and store the entry.
Note: You can also use the following procedure to store a fixed
dial entry by scrolling to and selecting Fixed Dial.
Enter Information
Find the Feature
M > Phonebook
M > New
Press To
1
CHANGE (J) select Name
2
keypad keys enter a name for the phonebook
entry (see “Entering Text” on
page 53)
3
OK (J) store the name
4
CHANGE (J) select No.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 88 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg11e.png)
89
Phonebook
5
keypad keys enter the phone number
6
OK (J) store the phone number
7
CHANGE (J) select Type
Note: This option is not available for
entries stored on a SIM card.
8
K scroll to the type of phone number
9
SELECT (J) select the number type
10
RECORD (J)
or
Go to step 11 if
you do not want
to record a voice
name for the
entry
record a Voice Name for the entry, if
desired
See “Recording a Voice Name For a
Phonebook Entry” on page 91.
Note: This option is not available for
entries stored on a SIM card.
11
K scroll to Speed No., the number to
speed dial
the entry
The next available speed dial number
is assigned to a new phonebook
number by default.
12
CHANGE (J) select Speed No. if you want to
change it
Press To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 89 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg11f.png)
Phonebook
90
Complete Phonebook Entry
When you are finished entering information for a phonebook
entry:
13
keypad keys enter a different speed number, if
desired
Note: Entries with a speed dial
number from 1 to 500 are stored on
the phone. Entries with a speed dial
number of 501 or higher are stored
on the SIM card.
14
OK (J) save the modified speed number
If your chosen speed number is
already assigned to another entry,
you are asked if you want to replace
that entry.
15
SELECT (J) select MORE if you want to create
another entry with the same Name
Note: You must enter a name and
number to use this option.
Press To
DONE (L) store the entry and return to the
phonebook list
Press To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 90 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg120.png)
91
Phonebook
Recording a Voice Name For a
Phonebook Entry
You can record a voice name when you create a new phonebook
entry, or when you edit a previously stored phonebook entry. This
lets you use voice dial to call the number without dialing (see
“Voice Dial Using a Soft Key” on page 93).
Note: You cannot record a voice name for an entry stored on a
SIM card.
Tip: Make your voice recording in a quiet location. Hold the
phone about four inches (10 centimeters) from your mouth, and
speak directly into the phone’s microphone in a normal tone of
voice.
Find the Feature
M > Phonebook
Do This To
1
Press K scroll to the entry that needs a
voice name
2
Press VIEW (J) display the entry’s detailed view
3
Press EDIT (J) edit the phonebook entry
4
Press K scroll to Voice Name
5
Press RECORD (J) begin the recording process
The phone displays Press
RECORD Key then say name.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 91 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg121.png)
Phonebook
92
Dialing a Phonebook Entry
You can use the phonebook list, voice dial, speed dial, or
1-touch dial to call a number stored in your phonebook. To use
speed dial, see “Dialing With Speed Dial” on page 39. To use
1-touch dial, see “Dialing With 1-Touch Dial” on page 40.
Phonebook List
To call a number in the phonebook list:
6
Press and release
RECORD (J) and say
the entry’s name (in
two seconds)
record the voice name
The phone displays Press
RECORD Key then REPEAT
name.
7
Press the voice key and
repeat the name
confirm the voice name
The phone displays Trained:
Voice Name.
Find the Feature
M > Phonebook
Press To
1
K scroll to the entry you want to call
2
N send the call
Do This To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 92 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg122.png)
93
Phonebook
Voice Dial Using a Soft Key
To call a number using voice dial via a soft key:
To pre-record a phonebook entry name, see “Recording a Voice
Name For a Phonebook Entry” on page 91.
Voice Dial Using the Menu
To call a number using voice dial via the menu:
Do This Result
Press and release L
and speak the entry’s
pre-recorded name
(within two seconds).
Your phone goes to the entry in
the phonebook list, repeats the
voice name, pauses two seconds,
then automatically dials the call.
Find the Feature
M > Voice Dial
Do This To
1
Press SELECT (J) activate the voice dial
mechanism
the phone displays Say Name
Now
2
Say the pre-recorded
phonebook entry name to select the entry to be dialed
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 93 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg123.png)
Phonebook
94
Editing a Phonebook Entry
You can edit a phonebook entry stored on your phone or the SIM
card.
Notes:
• If you change an entry’s speed dial number, the entry is
moved to the new speed dial location and the original entry
is deleted. Entries with a speed dial number from 1 to 500
are stored on the phone. Entries with a speed dial number
of 501 or higher are stored on the SIM card.
• You can also use the following procedure to edit a fixed dial
entry by scrolling to and selecting Fixed Dial.
Edit a phonebook entry or fixed dial entry by following the
procedures described in “Storing a Phonebook Entry” on
page 88.
Find the Feature
M > Phonebook
Press To
1
K scroll to the entry you want to edit
2
VIEW (J) display the entry’s detailed view
3
EDIT (J) edit the phonebook entry
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 94 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg124.png)
95
Phonebook
Deleting a Phonebook Entry
To delete a phonebook entry:
Copying Phonebook Entries Between
the Phone and SIM Card
You can copy one or more phonebook entries from your phone
to the SIM card or from the SIM card to your phone.
Notes:
• This procedure copies the original entry to a new location. It
does
not
delete the original entry.
• The SIM card cannot store Type and Voice Name data for
entries. If you try to copy an entry with a type or voice name
to the SIM card, the phone asks you for confirmation before
dropping this information and copying the entry.
Find the Feature
M > Phonebook
Press To
1
K scroll to the entry you want to delete
2
M open the Phonebook Menu
3
K scroll to Delete
4
SELECT (J) select Delete
5
YES (L) confirm the deletion
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 95 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg125.png)
Phonebook
96
Copy a Single Entry
To copy a single phonebook entry from your phone to the SIM
card or from the SIM card to your phone:
Find the Feature
M > Phonebook
Press To
1
K scroll to the entry you want to copy
Note: Entries with a speed dial
number from 1 to 500 are stored on
the phone. Entries with a speed dial
number of 501 or higher are stored
on the SIM card.
2
M open the Phonebook Menu
3
K scroll to Copy Entry
4
SELECT (J) select Copy Entry
The phone displays the Copy To
form, with the next available speed
dial number.
5
keypad keys edit the speed dial number on the
Copy To form
6
OK (J) approve the copy to the speed dial
number
The phone displays the Stored
message. You can now delete the old
phonebook entry, if desired.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 96 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg126.png)
97
Phonebook
Copy Multiple Entries
To copy multiple phonebook entries from your phone to the SIM
card or from the SIM card to your phone:
Find the Feature
M > Phonebook
Press To
1
M open the Phonebook Menu
2
K scroll to Copy Entries
3
SELECT (J) select Copy Entries
The phone displays the Copy Entries
form.
4
K scroll to From (start)
5
CHANGE (J) select From (start)
6
keypad keys enter the first (lowest) speed dial
number in the range of entries that
you want to copy
Note: Entries with a speed dial
number from 1 to 500 are stored on
the phone. Entries with a speed dial
number of 501 or higher are stored
on the SIM card.
7
OK (J) store the number and return to the
Copy Entries form
8
K scroll to From (end)
9
CHANGE (J) select From (end)
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 97 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg127.png)
Phonebook
98
10
keypad keys enter the last (highest) speed dial
number in the range of entries that
you want to copy
11
OK (J) store the number and return to the
Copy Entries menu
12
K scroll to To (start)
13
CHANGE (J) select To (start)
14
keypad keys enter the first (lowest) new speed dial
number for the entries’ new location
15
OK (J) store the number and return to the
Copy Entries menu
16
DONE (L) copy the entries
The phone displays the
Copied Entries message. You can
now delete the old entries, if desired.
Press To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 98 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg128.png)
99
Phonebook
Checking Phonebook Capacity
You can check phonebook capacity to see how much space is left
for storing phonebook entries on your phone and on the SIM
card. For entries stored on the phone, your phone displays a
memory meter that shows how much memory space remains to
store phonebook and datebook entries. For the SIM card, your
phone lists the number of phonebook entries used and the
number available.
Synchronizing with TrueSync Software
You can synchronize phonebook entries between your
phone and computer or hand-held device with Starfish
TrueSync® software, a Motorola accessory product. See
the TrueSync user guide for more information.
Note: TrueSync software is designed to synchronize with basic
features of many popular Personal Information Management
(PIM) software and hardware products.
Find the Feature
M > Phonebook
Press To
1
M open the Phonebook Menu
2
K scroll to Phone Capacity
3
SELECT (J) select Phone Capacity
Your phone displays the phone
memory meter, or the number of SIM
card phonebook entries available.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 99 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg129.png)
Phonebook
100
Setting Up the Phonebook
You can specify the sort order for your phonebook entries and
the location of your 1-touch dial entries.
Phonebook List Sort Preference
You can set up your phone to sort your phonebook list by speed
dial number (the standard), name, or voice dial.
Tip: The voice dial sort is identical to the name sort, except that
the entries with voice name tags appear first.
Find the Feature
M > Phonebook
Press To
1
M open the Phonebook Menu
2
K scroll to Setup
3
SELECT (J) select Setup
4
K scroll to Sort by
5
CHANGE (J) select Sort by
6
K scroll to the entry you want
7
SELECT (J) select the entry you want
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 100 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg12a.png)
101
Phonebook
1-Touch Dial Preference
Your phone lets you specify whether your 1-touch dial entries are
located on the phone or the SIM card:
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Other Settings
> Initial Setup
Press To
1
K scroll to 1-Touch Dial
2
CHANGE (J) select 1-Touch Dial
3
Kscroll to the list you want
4
SELECT (J) select the list you want
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 101 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg12b.png)
102
Datebook
The datebook is a calendar that lets you schedule and organize
events such as appointments and meetings. You can review your
schedule of events for the week or by the day, and have the
datebook play a reminder alarm for specific events.
Note: You must set the correct time and date in order to use the
datebook. Use the Time and Date feature (see page 74) to set
the time and date.
To schedule or review events in the datebook:
Week View
When you open the datebook, your phone displays a calendar
for the week. Lines or filled boxes under each day indicate
scheduled events.
Find the Feature
M > Datebook
Go to
selected day
Exit the
datebook
Untimed
event
12 hour
window One-hour event
Days of week
(press
*
(
left) o
r
#
(
right)
to
select)
Full day
(12-hour)
event scheduled
Press
M
to open
the
Datebook Menu
EXIT VIEW
{15 NOV-21 NOV
S M T W T F S
M
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 102 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg12c.png)
103
Datebook
Day View
Select a day in the week view and press VIEW (J) to see the
day’s events. You can store, edit, view, copy, and delete any
event from the day view.
Event View
Select an event in the day view and press VIEW (J) to open the
detailed event view. You can edit, copy, and delete events from
the event view.
Day of week
Show event
details
Return to
previous screen
Untimed
event Alarm
Event
Down scroll
arrow
Press
M
to open
the
Datebook Menu
{THU 19-NOV }
• Joe's B-day
9:00 A Marie,...
BACK VIEW
M
Day and time
Edit eventReturn to
previous screen
Event details
Alarm
Down scroll
arrow
Press
M
to open
the
Datebook
Menu
A THU 9:00 am
Marie, mtg about
new product
BACK EDIT
M
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 103 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg12d.png)
Datebook
104
Storing a New Event
A title is required for a datebook event. All other information is
optional.
See “Selecting a Feature” on page 50 for instructions on
scrolling to and selecting options.
Find the Feature
M > Datebook >
day
M > New
Press To
1
CHANGE (J) select Title
2
keypad keys enter a title for the event (see
“Entering Text” on page 53)
3
OK (J) store the event title
4
K scroll to other fields and enter
information as necessary
Other fields let you enter start time,
duration, date, repeating events, and
reminder alarm.
5
DONE (L) store the new event and return to the
day view
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 104 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg12e.png)
105
Datebook
Changing Event Information
To change information about an existing event:
Find the Feature
M > Datebook
Press To
1
K scroll to the scheduled event day
2
VIEW (J) display the day view
3
K scroll to the event you want to
change
4
VIEW (J) display the event view
5
EDIT (J) edit the event
6
Kscroll to the detail you want to
change
7
CHANGE (J) edit the information
8
keypad keys enter the new information
9
DONE (L) store the information and return to
the day view
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 105 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg12f.png)
Datebook
106
Copying an Event
To copy information from a current event to a new event:
Find the Feature
M > Datebook
Press To
1
Kscroll to the scheduled event day
2
VIEW (J) display the day view
3
K scroll to the event to copy
4
M open the Datebook Menu
5
K scroll to Copy
6
SELECT (J) copy the event
7
YES (J) confirm the copy
Your phone assumes that you want to
change the date, and displays the
Date field.
8
keypad keys enter the date information
9
} (J)move to the month, day, and year
10
DONE (L) save the copy of the event
11
K scroll to event details and edit the
information as necessary
12
DONE (L) store the new event and return to the
day view
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 106 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg130.png)
107
Datebook
Deleting an Event
Find the Feature
M > Datebook
Press To
1
Kscroll to the scheduled event day
2
VIEW (J) display the day view
3
K scroll to the event to delete
4
M open the Datebook Menu
5
K scroll to Delete
6
SELECT (J) select Delete
For non-repeating events, go to
step 7. For repeating events, the
phone displays a delete event
menu:
a
K scroll to This Event Only or
Repeat Events
b
SELECT (J) select the event(s) to delete
7
YES (L) confirm the deletion
The phone briefly displays a
Deleted: message and returns you
to the day view.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 107 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg131.png)
108
Radio
You can use your phone to tune, store presets, and listen
to FM radio stations when you use the optional Motorola
Original™ FM Stereo Radio Headset with your phone.
Turning the Radio On and Off
Note: The Radio (J) soft key option appears only when the
FM Stereo Radio Headset is plugged into the accessory
connector port.
Tuning a Station
Press To
Radio (J) turn the radio on and off
Do This To
Press K
or
Press and hold K
scroll up or down to the next
frequency
scroll up or down to the next
available stereo station
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 108 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg132.png)
109
Radio
Storing a Preset
To store a station to a preset that you can recall later:
Selecting a Preset
To select a preset radio station:
Sending and Receiving Calls With the
Radio On
Your phone interrupts the radio signal and rings or vibrates as
usual to notify you of an incoming call, message, or other event.
When you receive a call:
Do This To
Press and hold a number
key (1 to 9)
assign its preset number to the
tuned station
Press To
a number key (1 to 9) tune the station stored at that
preset location
Do This To
Press IGNORE (L) ignore the call
Press ANSWER (J)
or
Press the button on the
FM Stereo Radio Headset
microphone
answer the call
Note: You can use the FM
Stereo Radio Headset
microphone to converse with
the other party during a call
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 109 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg133.png)
Radio
110
To end the call and resume the FM broadcast:
Turn the radio off before dialing outgoing calls. You do not have
to turn off the FM radio feature to dial emergency numbers or
numbers selected from your phonebook or other lists.
Tip: To dial a recently called number, press N or the button on
the FM Stereo Radio Headset microphone to go to the dialed
calls list. For more information, see “Recent Calls” on page 79.
Do This To
Press O
or
Press and hold the button
on the FM Stereo Radio
Headset microphone
end the call
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 110 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg134.png)
111
Messages—Voicemail
You can listen to your voicemail messages by calling
your network voicemail phone number. Voicemail
messages are stored on the network—not on your
phone. Contact your service provider for more details.
Storing Your Voicemail Number
Store your voicemail number in your phone to make it faster and
easier to use voicemail. Your voicemail number is provided by
your service provider.
Receiving a New Voicemail Message
When you receive a voicemail message, your phone displays
New VoiceMail &. (Some networks only indicate when you
have messages, whether they are new or not.) If reminders are
turned on, your phone sends a reminder every five minutes until
you close the new message notification, listen to the message, or
turn off your phone. (See “Reminders” on page 140.)
Find the Feature
M > Messages
M > VoiceMail Setup
Press To
1
keypad keys enter the phone number for your
voicemail
2
OK (J) store the number
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 111 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg135.png)
Messages—Voicemail
112
From the new message notification:
Listening to a Voicemail Message
To listen to your voicemail messages at any time:
Your phone calls the voicemail phone number you stored. If you
do not have a voicemail number stored, the phone guides you
through storing a number.
Do This To
Press CALL (J) call your voicemail phone number
and listen to the message
Find the Feature
M > Messages > VoiceMail
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 112 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg136.png)
113
Messages—Text
Text messages are brief messages that you can send
and receive (such as Where are we meeting?).
Received messages appear on your phone display or in
your text message inbox.
You must set up the text message inbox
before
you can send and
receive these messages. The total number of messages the inbox
can hold depends on the length of the messages, and the
number of other messages and drafts stored in your phone.
Note: Your service provider may have already programmed the
text message inbox settings for you.
Setting Up the Text Message Inbox
Find the Feature
M > Messages
M > Text Msg Setup
Press To
1
K scroll to Srvce Center No.
2
CHANGE (J) change the Srvce Center No.
which is provided by your service
provider
3
keypad keys enter the phone number for the
service center that handles your
outgoing messages
4
OK (J) store your service center number
5
CHANGE (J) change the Expire After period
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 113 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg137.png)
Messages—Text
114
6
keypad keys enter the expiration period—the
number of days your network tries to
send unreceived messages
7
OK (J) store the expiration period
8
CHANGE (J) change the Reply Type
9
K scroll to the default type of replies
you want to send—text messages, or
other formats
10
OK (J) store the reply type
11
CHANGE (J) change the Cleanup setting
12
K scroll to the period of time that
messages stay in your inbox
13
SELECT (J) select the cleanup period
If you select Custom, continue.
Otherwise, the procedure is
complete.
14
K change the entry for the number or
label
15
Kswitch between the number and the
label
16
DONE (L) store the custom cleanup period after
you finish entering all information
Press To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 114 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg138.png)
115
Messages—Text
Receiving a Text Message
Note: You must set up the text message inbox before you can
receive text messages. See “Setting Up the Text Message Inbox”
on page 113.
When you receive a new message, your phone displays New
Message X and gives an alert. If reminders are turned on, your
phone sends a reminder every five minutes until you close the
new message notification, read the message, or turn off your
phone. (See “Reminders” on page 140.)
When your inbox is full, any new message replaces the oldest
unlocked message.
From the new message notification:
Reading, Locking, or Deleting a Text
Message
You can open your text message inbox to read, lock, or delete
messages at any time.
Messages in the text message inbox are sorted from newest to
oldest. The oldest messages are deleted as new ones are added.
If you want to save a message, you should lock it to prevent it
from being overwritten as new messages are received.
Press To
READ (J) open the message (or your text
message inbox if there are multiple
messages)
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 115 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg139.png)
Messages—Text
116
The Text Msg Menu includes the following options:
Find the Feature
M > Messages > Text Msgs
Press To
1
K scroll to the message you want
(d = unread and urgent,
n = read, f = read and locked)
2
READ (J) open the message
3
SAVE (J—right)
or
DELETE (L—left)
or
M
close the message without changes
delete the message
open the Text Msg Menu to
perform other procedures as
described in the following list
Option Description
Call Back Call the number in the message header or
the message text.
Go To Go to a Web address (URL) in the
message.
Reply Open a new text message, with the
message’s Reply To number in the To
field.
Forward Open a copy of the text message, with an
empty To field.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 116 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg13a.png)
117
Messages—Text
Sending a Text Message
You can create and send a text message to one or more
recipients. The text message feature lets you manually enter each
recipient’s phone number, or select one or more numbers from
the phonebook or recent calls lists.
Note: When you manually enter multiple phone numbers in the
To field, you must insert a space between each number. Press
and hold 1 to insert a space as needed.
Lock/Unlock Lock or unlock the message.
Store Number Open a new phonebook entry with the
message’s embedded number in the No.
field.
Delete
or
Delete All
Delete the message or all inbox messages.
Press Yes (L) to confirm the deletion.
Create Message Open a new text message form.
Setup Open the inbox setup menu.
Find the Feature
M > Messages
M > Create Message
Press To
1
CHANGE (J) select To
Option Description
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 117 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg13b.png)
Messages—Text
118
2
keypad keys
or
BROWSE (J)
enter one or more phone numbers
where you want to send the message
Tip: Remember to press and hold
1 to add a space between numbers
that you enter manually.
select one or more phone numbers
from the phonebook or recent calls
lists
3
OK (J) store the number(s)
4
CHANGE (J) select Msg
5
keypad keys enter the text message (see “Entering
Text” on page 53)
Note: Message length is limited.
When 40 or fewer characters remain,
a two-digit counter at the top of the
display shows how many are left.
6
OK (J) store the text message
7
DONE (L) finish the message
Your phone displays
Send Message Now?
Press To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 118 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg13c.png)
119
Messages—Text
Viewing the Status of Sent Text
Messages
Text messages that you send are stored in the outbox. To view
the contents of your outbox:
Messages are sorted from newest to oldest.
The following icons indicate message status:
8
YES (J)
or
NO (L)
send the message
cancel the message or save it as a
draft
A saved message is stored in the
drafts folder, where you can edit it
and send it at a later time.
Find the Feature
M > Messages > Outbox
á = sending in progress Y = delivered
m = sending failed
Press To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 119 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg13d.png)
120
Shortcuts
Your phone includes several pre-programmed shortcuts. You can
create additional shortcuts, if you like, to mark frequently used
menu items.
Standard Shortcuts
The following shortcuts are pre-programmed in your phone. You
cannot edit or delete these shortcuts.
User-Settable Shortcuts
You can create shortcuts to many menu features and
applications. A shortcut takes you directly to the menu item, or
performs the menu action (if applicable).
Do This To
Press M, then press
and hold M (within
two seconds)
zoom in/out your phone’s display
view
(See “Changing the Zoom Setting”
on page 30.)
Press M #display your phone number
Press Ngo to the dialed calls list
(See “Recent Calls” on page 79.)
Press Oexit the menu system, return to the
idle display
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 120 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg13e.png)
121
Shortcuts
Creating a Shortcut
To assign a keypad shortcut:
Do This To
1
Press Menter the menu system
2
Scroll to the item to
which you want to
assign a shortcut
highlight the menu item
3
Press and hold Mopen the shortcut editor
The phone displays:
Assign Shortcut for:
“
Item
”?
where
Item
is the name of the
item you selected.
4
Press YES (L) view shortcut options
5
Press CHANGE (J)
or
Press DONE (L)
change the keypad shortcut
number, if necessary
select the default keypad
shortcut number and close the
shortcut editor
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 121 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg13f.png)
Shortcuts
122
Using Shortcuts
You can use a shortcut from the idle display, while on a call, or
while scrolling through a menu.
Use a Keypad Shortcut
If you know the shortcut number:
Select a Shortcut From the List
To select a shortcut from the shortcut list:
Press To
1
M open the menu
2
the shortcut’s number go to the menu item, or perform
the menu action
Find the Feature
M > Shortcuts
>
the shortcut you want
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 122 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg140.png)
123
Micro-Browser
The micro-browser lets you access Web pages and
Web-based applications (such as on-line banking,
shopping, and games) on your phone. Contact your
service provider to set up access, if necessary.
Note: Your phone may be configured to use a high-speed GPRS
(General Packet Radio Service) network connection. This type of
connection can be identified by a GPRS indicator in the idle
display that disappears when you start a micro-browser session.
If a W (connected call) indicator is displayed when you start a
micro-browser session, your phone is using a standard voice
channel connection. Your network connection charges may vary
depending on the type of connection used.
Starting a Micro-Browser Session
To open the micro-browser:
The micro-browser displays the home page set up by your service
provider.
Shortcut: If you open a text message with a Web address (URL)
in it, you can go directly to the URL by selecting M > Go To.
Find the Feature
M > Browser
Press To
1
K scroll to a bookmark or service,
service, or application
2
SELECT (J) select the service
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 123 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg141.png)
Micro-Browser
124
If you are unable to establish a network connection with the
micro-browser, contact your service provider.
Interacting With Web Pages
You can perform the following operations on a Web page:
Do This To
Press Kscroll through a text message
Press K and then
SELECT (J)
scroll through and select items in a
list
Press keypad keys
and then OK (J)
enter requested information
Tip: Press * to delete one letter
at a time if you make a mistake.
Press K to scroll to a
phone number on a Web
page, then press N
call the number from the
micro-browser
Press * and #go back to the previous Web page
Press Mopen the Browser Menu
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 124 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg142.png)
125
Calculator
You can use your phone as a convenient calculator and currency
converter.
Calculating Numbers
Find the Feature
M > Calculator
Press To
1
number keys enter a number in the calculator
2
*
(
left) or
#
(
right)
highlight a calculator function
3
SELECT (J) perform the highlighted function
Selected function
appears here
Perform the
highlighted
function
Press
M
to open
the
Calculator Menu
Exit the
calculator
Entered
number
Press
*
(
left) or
#
(
right)
to
highlight a
function and to
view unseen
functions by
scrolling left/
right
EXIT SELECT
M
.C=+-x÷
+0
}
Calculator
Press
*
(
left) or
#
(
right)
to
scroll to other
functions
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 125 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg143.png)
Calculator
126
The calculator can perform the following functions:
Function Description
. Insert a decimal point
C Clear the calculation
CE Clear entry (replaces the C function when you
enter subsequent values in a calculation)
+ Add
- Subtract
x Multiply
÷ Divide
% Divide the displayed value by 100
$ Calculate the exchange rate
+- Change the entry’s sign (positive/negative)
MR Recall the value stored in memory
MS Store the displayed number in memory
MC Clear memory
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 126 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg144.png)
127
Calculator
Converting Currency
The currency converter works just like the calculator, but uses
the $ (currency) function:
Find the Feature
M > Calculator
M > Exchange Rate
Press To
1
number keys enter the exchange rate
2
OK (J) store the exchange rate
3
number keys enter the amount to convert (amount
to multiply by the exchange rate)
4
*
(
left) or
#
(
right)
highlight the $ function
5
SELECT (J) perform the conversion
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 127 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg145.png)
128
Games
Your phone contains three games that you can play between
phone calls. If you get an incoming call, message, alarm, or alert,
the game ends automatically.
Selecting and Starting a New Game
When the game is over, you can play another session of the
same game or return to the games menu.
Find the Feature
M > Games
Press To
1
K scroll to the game of your choice
2
SELECT (J) start the game
Press To
BACK (L—left)
or
NO (L—left)
return to the games menu
NEW (J—right)
or
YES (J—right)
start another session of the game you
just played
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 128 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg146.png)
129
Games
A
7
A
Ending a Game
You can end a game at any time.
Playing a Game
Blackjack
In this classic Las Vegas card game, you play against the dealer
to see who can get closer to 21 points without going over.
Rules of the game
• With each new hand, the first card is dealt to the dealer.
The dealer’s cards are shown at the top of the display, and
your cards are shown at the bottom.
• All face cards count as 10 points.
• All number cards count as the points shown on their face.
• An Ace counts as 11 points, unless that would put you over
21 points. Otherwise, an Ace is counted as 1 point. An Ace
that was originally counted as 11 may later be counted as 1
point if it will bring your points under or equal to 21 points.
• An initial deal of an Ace and a card with a face value of 10
points counts as exactly 21 points or Blackjack.
Press To
BACK (L)
or
O
end the game session and return to
the games menu
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 129 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg147.png)
Games
130
• Blackjack automatically wins against any other hand that
totals 21 points.
• If you score more than 21 points, you go “bust” or lose.
• If you get five cards without going bust, you win.
• If you and the dealer have the same score, the dealer wins.
• You can ask for a “hit” or another card as long as you do
not go bust.
• As long as the dealer’s total is less than 17 points, the
dealer must continue to take a hit.
How to Play
When the game begins, you are dealt two cards. Based on their
total face value, you can:
Mindblaster
Your goal is to guess a secret four-symbol code. You play by
entering symbols into four spaces and then submitting a guess.
Rules of the Game
• Your score is the number of guesses it takes to reveal the
secret code.
Press To
STAY (L) see the results of the hand
HIT ME (J) request another card
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 130 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg148.png)
131
Games
A
7
A
• When you submit a guess, you are given clues that indicate
how many symbols you have identified correctly and how
many are in the correct position. The position of the clues
does
not
correspond to the location of the symbols.
• You can see a history of your last 10 guesses.
• Once you enter a symbol into a blank space, you can
change the symbol but you cannot make the space blank
again.
• When you correctly guess the four-symbol code, the display
shows your score and the level of your next game.
• After you win one game, you progress from level 1 to
level 2.
• After you win two more games, you progress from level 2 to
level 3.
• When you exit the game or turn off the phone, you begin
again at level 1.
= correct symbol in correct position
= correct symbol in wrong position
= wrong symbol in wrong position
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 131 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg149.png)
Games
132
How to Play
When the game begins, you see four blank spaces. To play the
game:
Paddleball
In this test of endurance, your mission is move your paddle to
strike a bouncing ball. The more you succeed, the smaller your
paddle gets.
Rules of the game
• Your score is the number of times your paddle hits the ball.
• You lose when the paddle misses the ball.
How to play
Do This To
Press *
(
left) or
#
(
right)
move from space to space
Press K place a symbol in a space
Press GUESS (K)submit a guess (when all four spaces
contain symbols)
Select > and then
press K
scroll through and view a history of
your last 10 guesses
Press To
K move your paddle so that it hits the
bouncing ball
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 132 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg14a.png)
133
Adjusting Your Settings
You can adjust a wide variety of phone settings to suit your
needs.
Ring/Vibrate
Your phone rings or vibrates to notify you of an incoming call,
message, or other event. This ring or vibration is called an
alert
.
You can select one of five different alert profiles:
The alert setting indicator in your display shows the current alert
profile (see illustration on page 28).
Each alert profile contains settings for ringer and keypad volume.
It also includes alert tone settings for different events: incoming
calls, text messages, voicemail messages, data calls, fax calls,
alarms, and reminders. You can modify the settings in each
profile.
Select an Alert Profile
w Loud ring x Soft ring
y Vibrate u Ring and vibrate
t Silent
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate
> Alert
Press To
1
K scroll to the alert profile you want to
use
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 133 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg14b.png)
Adjusting Your Settings
134
Customize an Alert Profile
You can customize a profile by changing the alerts used for
specific events (such as incoming calls, text messages, etc.). Your
phone includes a variety of preset alert tones and vibrations. Any
changes you make are saved to the current alert profile.
Tip: This feature also lets you set the profile’s ringer volume and
keypad volume.
2
SELECT (J) select the alert profile
The phone displays the
Changed: Alert message.
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate
>
Alert
Detail
Press To
1
K scroll to the event for which you want
to set a new alert
2
CHANGE (J) select the event
The phone displays the list of
available alerts.
3
K scroll to the alert you want for the
event
4
SELECT (J) select the alert
The phone displays the
Changed:
Event Alert
message.
Press To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 134 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg14c.png)
135
Adjusting Your Settings
Use the My Tones Feature
The my tones feature lets you create up to 32 custom alert tones
for your phone. The tones you create appear in the list of
available alerts (see “Customize an Alert Profile” on page 134).
Creating a Tone
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate
> My Tones
Press To
1
K scroll to [New Tone]
2
SELECT (J) select [New Tone]
3
CHANGE (J) select Notes
4
keypad keys enter notes for the tone (see
“Entering Notes” on page 136)
5
OK (J) store the notes
6
CHANGE (J) select Name
7
keypad keys enter the name for the tone
8
OK (J) store the name
9
DONE (L) store the tone
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 135 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg14d.png)
Adjusting Your Settings
136
Entering Notes
To create a new tone, use the keypad keys to enter each note.
Press a key multiple times to cycle through its available notes or
options (pitch, octave, or length). The default setting for a new
tone is a quarter note in octave two.
Key Display Description
1 1 set octave one
2 set octave two
3 set octave three
2 A note A
B note B
C note C
2set octave two
3 D note D
E note E
F note F
3set octave three
4 G note G
R rest
7 # sharp
b flat
0 q quarter note or quarter rest
h half note or half rest
w whole note or whole rest
*move cursor left
#move cursor right
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 136 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg14e.png)
137
Adjusting Your Settings
Enter a note as follows:
Task Action
Change the
octave
Set the new octave (1, 2, or 3)
before
selecting the note. The new octave applies
to the note and all following notes until
you change it again.
Select the note
(required)
Press a keypad key to enter a note.
Change a note to
a sharp or flat
Enter a sharp or flat (# or b)
after
selecting
the note.
Some sharps and flats are played as
standard notes. For example, B# is the
same as C. Press K to scroll to valid notes
when entering a new note.
Change a note’s
length
Set the new length (h, w, or q)
after
selecting the note. The new length applies
to the note and all following notes until
you change it again.
Add a rest Enter one or more rests (R characters) as
needed in the tone sequence. You can set
the length of the rest by entering an h, w,
or q character
after
the rest, just as you
can for a note.
Listen to a new
tone as you
compose it
Press M to enter the Compose Menu,
and select Play All to play the notes you
have entered.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 137 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg14f.png)
Adjusting Your Settings
138
Example
Press these keys to play this sequence of notes and rests in
octave three: C (quarter note), E flat (quarter note), half rest,
and G (whole note):
Playing a Tone
Press To Display
1
1 1 1set octave three 3
2
2 2 2enter a quarter note CC
3
3 3 7 7enter a quarter note E
flat
Eb
4
4 4 0 0enter a half rest Rh
5
4 0 0 0enter a whole note GGw
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate
> My Tones
Press To
1
K scroll to the tone you want to play
2
M open the My Tones Menu
3
K scroll to Play
4
SELECT (J) select Play
The phone displays the playback
meter and plays the tone.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 138 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg150.png)
139
Adjusting Your Settings
Editing a Tone
You cannot edit the standard alert tones included with your
phone. To edit a custom tone that you created:
Deleting a Tone
You cannot delete the standard alert tones included with your
phone. To delete a custom tone that you created:
5
PLAY (J)
or
CANCEL (L)
play the tone again
return to the my tones list
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate
> My Tones
Press To
1
K scroll to the tone you want to edit
2
EDIT (J) open the tone details
3
K scroll to the details you want to edit
(Name or Notes)
4
CHANGE (J) select the details you want to edit
5
keypad keys enter new text or notes (see
“Entering Notes” on page 136)
6
OK (J) store the details
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate
> My Tones
Press To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 139 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg151.png)
Adjusting Your Settings
140
Reminders
Reminders are alerts that ring or vibrate to notify you about a
voicemail or text message you have received, or a datebook
event you have scheduled.
To set or turn off reminders:
Press To
1
K scroll to the tone you want to delete
2
M open the My Tones Menu
3
K scroll to Delete
4
SELECT (J) select Delete
5
YES (L) confirm the deletion
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Ring/Vibrate
>
Alert
Detail > Reminders
Press To
1
K scroll to the reminder alert you want:
Beep, Vibrate, or Off
Beep or Vibrate sets the
corresponding reminder alert type.
Off turns off all reminders.
2
SELECT (J) select the reminder alert
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 140 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg152.png)
141
Adjusting Your Settings
Call Forwarding
Call forwarding sends your phone’s incoming voice,
fax, and/or data calls directly to another phone
number. Use call forwarding options to specify which
calls your phone should forward. When you are ready
to accept calls on your phone again, you can turn off call
forwarding.
Set Up or Cancel Call Forwarding
The call forwarding options for voice, fax, or data calls are:
All Calls forwards all calls
If Unavailable forwards calls if your phone is unavailable
Detailed uses different forwarding numbers if you
are out of range, unable to answer, or
busy (
voice calls only
)
Off does not forward calls
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Call Forward
Press To
1
K scroll to the type of calls you want to
forward
(Cancel All cancels all call
forwarding and ends the procedure.)
2
SELECT (J) open the call forward details for that
call type
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 141 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg153.png)
Adjusting Your Settings
142
Note: You can repeat this procedure to enter forwarding
information for other call types.
Check Call Forwarding Status
Your network may store call forwarding status for you. If you
change your phone’s call forward settings (see “Set Up or Cancel
Call Forwarding” on page 141), then you should confirm that
the network call forward status matches your preferences.
3
K scroll to Forward
4
CHANGE (J) change the Forward option
5
K scroll to the call forward option you
want
6
SELECT (J) store the option
7
K scroll to To (same for If Busy,
If No Answer, or If Unreachable)
8
CHANGE (J) change the phone number
9
keypad keys
or
BROWSE (J)
enter the forwarding phone number
browse through your phonebook or
other lists for the forwarding phone
number
10
OK (J) store the forwarding phone number
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Call Forward
> Forward Status
Press To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 142 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg154.png)
143
Adjusting Your Settings
Reordering Menu Items
You can customize the order of the items in your phone’s main
menu, depending upon your usage.
Press To
1
K scroll to Voice, Fax, or Data calls
2
View (L) confirm that the network settings are
correct
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Other Settings
> Personalize > Main Menu
Press To
1
K scroll to the menu item you want to
move
2
GRAB (L) grab the menu item you want to
move
3
K move the item up or down the menu
4
INSERT (L) insert the item in the new location
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 143 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg155.png)
Adjusting Your Settings
144
Customizing a Soft Key Function
You can relabel the soft keys (left L and right J) to access
different main menu items from the idle display.
Hands-Free Use
You can user your phone without using your hands by using the
phone headset. Be sure that your phone is rotated open.
You can also purchase an optional Motorola Original™
Easy-Install Hands-Free Kit for your car. This accessory
provides an alternative way for you to use your phone
without using your handset.
Note: The use of wireless devices and their accessories may be
prohibited or restricted in certain areas. Always obey the laws
and regulations on the use of these products.
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Other Settings
> Personalize > Keys
Press To
1
K scroll to Left or Right
2
CHANGE (L) open the key editor
3
K scroll to the new key function
4
SELECT (L) confirm the new function
The key will have the new function
whenever the phone is idle.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 144 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg156.png)
145
Adjusting Your Settings
Automatic Answer
When you activate automatic answer and connect your phone to
the Easy-Install Hands-Free Kit or phone headset, your phone
automatically answers calls after two rings.
Automatic Hands-Free
You can set up your phone to automatically route calls to the
Easy-Install Hands-Free Kit when it detects a connection.
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Other Settings
Press To
1
K scroll to Car Settings or Headset
2
SELECT (J) select the feature
3
K scroll to Auto Answer
4
SELECT (J) select Auto Answer
5
K scroll to On or Off
6
SELECT (J) confirm the setting
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Other Settings
> Car Settings
> Auto Handsfree
Press To
1
K scroll to On or Off
2
SELECT (J) confirm the setting
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 145 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg157.png)
Adjusting Your Settings
146
Power-Off Delay
When your phone is connected to the Easy-Install Hands-Free
Kit, you can set it to stay on for a specified time period after you
switch off the ignition. This keeps your phone from draining your
vehicle battery by staying on indefinitely, but leaves your phone
on long enough that you do not have to re-enter your unlock
code when you make short stops.
Caution: If you select Continuous, the phone does not power
off when you turn off the ignition. Be careful not to accidentally
drain your vehicle battery if you select this option.
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Other Settings
> Car Settings
> Power-Off Delay
Press To
1
K scroll to the time delay option you
want
2
SELECT (J) confirm your selection
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 146 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg158.png)
147
Adjusting Your Settings
Charger Time
When your phone is connected to the Easy-Install Hands-Free
Kit, you can set it to charge itself for a specified time period after
you switch off the ignition. This helps ensure that the phone
battery gets fully charged while the vehicle is parked.
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Other Settings
> Car Settings
> Charger Time
Press To
1
K scroll to the charge time option you
want
2
SELECT (J) confirm your selection
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 147 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg159.png)
148
Data and Fax Calls
A Motorola Original™ data kit lets you transfer data
between your phone and a computer or other external
device. You can:
• synchronize data between your phone and an external
device with Starfish TrueSync® software, a Motorola
accessory product. See the TrueSync user guide for more
information.
Note: TrueSync software is designed to synchronize with
basic features of many popular Personal Information
Management (PIM) software and hardware products.
• use your phone as a modem to connect to the Internet
Note: 56K modems are capable of receiving 56Kbps from a
compatible service provider. Receiving is currently limited in
the U.S. and Canada to 53 Kbps, and transmitting to 33.6
Kbps. Actual speeds will vary depending on line conditions.
• use your phone to send and receive data and fax calls on
your computer or hand-held device.
For more information about Motorola Original data kits, see the
Motorola Web site at:
http://www.motorola.com/dataaccessories
(United States)
http://www.motorola.ca/dataaccessories
(Canada)
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 148 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg15a.png)
149
Data and Fax Calls
Connecting Your Phone to an External
Device
Connect your phone to an external device (such as a computer or
hand-held device) using a serial cable or a USB cable.
Note: Not all devices are compatible with serial cable or USB
cable connections. Check your external device for specifications.
Set Up a Cable Connection
Attach a serial cable or Motorola Original USB cable to the
phone and external device as follows.
Note: Check your computer or hand-held device to determine
the type of cable you need.
Attaching a Serial Cable
Use the interchangeable head on the Motorola Multi-Connect
Serial Cable to connect a computer, Palm III device, or Palm V
device to your phone.
Do This
1
Plug the serial cable into the detachable head. Make sure
that the Motorola logo on the detachable head and the
metal shielding on the serial cable plug are both facing
you.
2
With the Motorola logo and the phone both facing you,
plug the detachable head into your phone’s accessory
connector port.
3
Plug the other end of the cable into the serial interface
connection on the external device and tighten the screws.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 149 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg15b.png)
Data and Fax Calls
150
Attaching a USB Cable
Install the Software
Install the software from the CD-ROM that comes with your
Motorola Original data kit. See the data kit’s user guide for more
information.
Sending a Data or Fax Call
You can connect your phone to a computer or hand-held device
to send data or a fax from the connected device.
Use this feature to transfer data from your computer onto
another device, and to synchronize phonebook and datebook
information between your phone, computer, and/or hand-held
device.
Connect your phone (see “Connecting Your Phone to an External
Device” on page 149) and do the following:
Do This
1
Plug the end of the cable with the Motorola logo into your
phone’s accessory connector port. Make sure that the logo
and the phone are both facing you.
2
Plug the other end—the USB connection—into the USB
port on the external device.
Do This To
1
Check the phone make sure that the phone is
connected and powered on
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 150 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg15c.png)
151
Data and Fax Calls
Receiving a Data or Fax Call
You can connect your phone to a computer or hand-held device
to receive data or a fax.
Use this feature to transfer data to your computer from another
device.
Transfer the Data or Fax
Connect your phone (see “Connecting Your Phone to an External
Device” on page 149).
Your phone notifies you when the data or fax call arrives, and
transfers the call to the connected device. You must use the
application running on the connected device to answer the call.
2
Open the
application on
your computer
place the call through the application
(such as dial-up-networking or fax)
Note: You cannot dial data or fax
numbers through your phone’s
keypad. You must dial them through
your computer.
3
End the transfer
on your computer
close the call and connection when
the transfer is complete
Do This To
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 151 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg15d.png)
Data and Fax Calls
152
End the Data/Fax Connection
When the data or fax transfer is complete:
Sending a Talk then Fax Call
You can place a call where you talk and then send a
fax to the same phone number within the same call.
Connect to the device that will send the fax (see
“Connecting Your Phone to an External Device” on page 149)
and do the following:
Do This To
End the call from the
connected device
close the connection
Press To
1
keypad keys enter the phone number for the call
2
M open the Dialing Menu
3
K scroll to Talk Then Fax
4
SELECT (J) select Talk Then Fax (for the next
call only)
5
N dial the call
Speak and, when ready, initiate the
fax transfer on the connected device.
When transfer is complete, end the
call from the connected device.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 152 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg15e.png)
153
Security
Assigning a New Code or Password
Your phone’s four-digit unlock code is originally set to 1234, and
the six-digit security code is originally set to 000000 at the
factory. Your service provider may reset these numbers before
you receive your phone.
If your service provider has
not
reset these numbers, we
recommend that you change them to prevent other users from
accessing your personal information or modifying your phone
settings. The unlock code must contain four digits, and the
security code must contain six digits. Be sure to make a note of
the new numbers.
Notes:
• Your service provider may retain your phone’s security code
for customer service purposes. In this case, you will not be
able to use phone features that require you to enter the
security code (such as master clear, master reset, and the
unlock code bypass feature).
• If the only password you can change is the unlock code, the
New Passwords menu is unavailable and the Unlock Code
option appears on the Phone Lock menu. In this case, open
the unlock code editor by selecting: M > Settings
> Security > Phone Lock > Unlock Code.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 153 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg15f.png)
Security
154
To change a code or password:
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Security
> New Passwords
Press To
1
K scroll to the code or password you
want to change
2
CHANGE (J) select the code or password
3
keypad keys enter your old code
If you do not know your code, see “If
You Forget a Code or Password” on
page 155.
4
OK (J) submit your old code
5
keypad keys enter the new code
6
OK (J) assign the new code
7
keypad keys re-enter the new code
8
OK (J) confirm the new code
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 154 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg160.png)
155
Security
If You Forget a Code or Password
If you forget your security code (originally set to 000000), SIM
PIN, SIM PIN2, or call barring password, contact your service
provider.
If you forget your unlock code, try entering 1234 or the last four
digits of your phone number. If that does not work, do the
following when you see the Enter Unlock Code message:
Locking and Unlocking Your Phone
You can lock your phone manually or set your phone to lock
automatically whenever you turn it off.
When you try to use a locked phone, it asks you to enter the
unlock code. A locked phone still rings or vibrates for incoming
calls or messages,
but you must unlock it to answer
.
You can make emergency calls on your phone even when it is
locked. See “Dialing an Emergency Number” on page 38.
Press To
1
M go to the unlock code bypass screen
2
keypad keys enter your security code
3
OK (J) submit your security code
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 155 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg161.png)
Security
156
Lock Your Phone Manually
Set Your Phone to Lock Automatically
You can set your phone to lock every time you turn it off:
Unlock Your Phone
At the Enter Unlock Code prompt:
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Security
> Phone Lock > Lock Now
Press To
1
keypad keys enter your four-digit unlock code
2
OK (J) lock the phone
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Security
> Phone Lock > Automatic Lock
> On
Press To
1
keypad keys enter your four-digit unlock code
2
OK (J) set the phone to lock automatically
Press To
1
keypad keys enter your four-digit unlock code
The unlock code is originally set to
1234. If necessary, see “If You Forget
a Code or Password” on page 155.
2
OK (J) unlock your phone
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 156 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg162.png)
157
Security
Barring Calls
Call barring lets you restrict outgoing or incoming
calls. You can restrict all calls, calls to international
numbers, or calls while roaming.
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Security
> Call Barring
Press To
1
K scroll to Outgoing or Incoming calls
2
CHANGE (J) select barring for Outgoing or
Incoming calls
3
K scroll to a restriction for the barred
calls
4
SELECT (J) select the restriction for the barred
calls
5
keypad keys enter your call barring password
6
OK (J) submit your password
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 157 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg163.png)
Security
158
Protecting the SIM Card
Your PIN (Personal Identification Number) code protects the
information stored on your SIM card. When the SIM PIN feature
is activated, you must enter your SIM card PIN code each time
you turn on the phone or insert a SIM card. Your SIM card PIN
code is given to you by your service provider.
Unblock the SIM Card PIN Code
If you enter an incorrect SIM card PIN code three times in a row,
your SIM card is disabled and your phone displays the message
SIM Blocked. You need to enter a PIN unblocking key (PUK)
code, which you can obtain from your service provider.
Find the Feature
M > Settings > Security
> SIM PIN
Press To
1
K scroll to On or Off
2
SELECT (J) switch protection on or off
3
keypad keys enter your SIM card PIN code
4
OK (J) submit your code
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 158 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg164.png)
159
Security
Note: In the following key sequence, each key press must occur
within two seconds of the previous keypress.
Caution: If the unblocking attempt is tried unsuccessfully 10
times, the SIM card is permanently disabled and your phone
displays the message SIM Disabled.
Press To
1
# # 0 5
*
open the PIN unblocking editor
Your phone prompts you to enter
the PIN1 Unblock Sequence:.
2
keypad keys enter the PUK code
3
OK (J) submit the PUK code
Your phone prompts you to
Enter New SIM PIN:.
4
keypad keys enter a new SIM card PIN code
Note: The SIM PIN code must be
between four and eight digits in
length.
5
OK (J) assign the new SIM PIN code
Your phone prompts you to
Re-enter New SIM PIN:.
6
keypad keys re-enter your SIM card PIN code
7
OK (J) confirm the new SIM PIN code
and unblock the SIM card
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 159 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg165.png)
160
Troubleshooting
Check these questions first if you have problems with your
phone:
Question Answer
Is your battery
charged? Do you
see B in the
display?
The battery level indicator should have
at least one segment showing (C). If
it does not, recharge your battery. (See
“Charging the Battery” on page 22 and
“Battery Use” on page 33.)
Is the phone set
to the proper
frequency for
your
geographical
region?
Phones in different regions of the world
use different frequencies to establish a
network connection. If necessary, use
the Network feature (see page 77) to
reset your phone’s frequency to
900/1800 MHz when you travel to a
new location.
Do you have a
valid SIM card
inserted in your
phone?
If necessary, turn off your phone and
make sure that you have inserted a valid
SIM card. (See “Installing the SIM Card
and Battery” on page 19).
Does the handset
have a signal?
Do you see j in
the display?
The signal strength indicator should
have at least one segment showing (1).
If it does not, move to an area with a
stronger signal to use your phone.
Is the earpiece
volume too low?
While on a call, press the volume key on
the side of your phone.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 160 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg166.png)
161
Troubleshooting
The following refer to specific problems:
Is the other party
unable to hear
you?
Your phone may be muted. Press
UNMUTE (J) if necessary to unmute
the phone.
Also, make sure that your phone’s
microphone is not blocked by its
carrying case or a sticker.
Has the phone
been damaged,
dropped, or
gotten wet?
Dropping your phone, getting it wet, or
using a non-Motorola battery or battery
charger can damage the phone. The
phone’s limited warranty does not cover
liquid damage or damage caused from
using non-Motorola accessories.
Was a
non-Motorola
battery or
battery charger
used?
Problem Solution
My phone was
stolen. To whom
should I report
this?
Report a stolen phone to the police and
to your service provider (the company
that sends you your monthly wireless
service bill).
I forgot my
password.
See “If You Forget a Code or Password”
on page 155.
Question Answer
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 161 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg167.png)
Troubleshooting
162
I pressed the
End/Power key,
but nothing
happened.
Be sure to press and hold O (the End/
Power key) until the display appears and
you hear an audible alert (this could
take a couple of seconds). If nothing
happens, check that a charged battery
is installed. (See “Charging the Battery”
on page 22.)
The display says:
Insert SIM Card
or Check SIM Card
even though I
have inserted my
SIM card in the
phone.
The SIM card may be incorrectly
inserted. Check the SIM card to make
sure that it is inserted properly. See
“Installing the SIM Card and Battery”
on page 19.
Note: Be sure to turn your phone off
and then back on after you re-insert the
SIM card.
The display says:
SIM Blocked. How
do I unblock my
SIM card?
Call your service provider (the company
that sends you your monthly wireless
service bill) to obtain the PIN
unblocking key (PUK) code. See
“Unblock the SIM Card PIN Code” on
page 158.
The display says:
Enter Unlock
Code. How do I
unlock my
phone?
Enter the factory-preset unlock code
(1234), or the last four digits of your
phone number. (See “Locking and
Unlocking Your Phone” on page 155.) If
this fails, call your service provider (the
company that sends you your monthly
wireless service bill).
Problem Solution
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 162 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg168.png)
163
Troubleshooting
My phone asks
for an unlock
code when I try
to open a
feature.
The application you want is locked. If
you own the phone but do not know
the unlock code, see “If You Forget a
Code or Password” on page 155.
My phone does
not ring.
If you see t or y in the display,
then the ringer is turned off. See
“Ring/Vibrate” on page 133.
Also, the ringer may be set to Silent
even though your phone is set to a ring
alert profile. See “Customize an Alert
Profile” on page 134.
My phone rings
even though I
selected the
Silent (or
Vibrate) alert
profile.
The ringer may be set to play a tone
even though your phone is set to a
silent alert profile. See “Customize an
Alert Profile” on page 134.
I tried to place a
call and heard an
alternating high/
low tone.
Your call did not reach the wireless
system. You may have dialed the
number too soon after turning the
phone on. Wait until the display shows
the name of your service provider
before making a call.
Problem Solution
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 163 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg169.png)
Troubleshooting
164
I cannot send/
receive calls.
Make sure that you have a phone signal
(see the “Signal Strength Indicator”
item on page 28). Avoid electrical or
radio interference, and obstructions
such as bridges, parking garages, or tall
buildings.
Your phone also may have
theCall Barring feature turned on. If
you know the unlock code, you can
change this setting in the security menu
(M > Settings > Security).Also,
check to be sure your SIM card is
installed and working
My phone has
poor reception
and drops calls.
Make sure that your antenna is not bent
or damaged.
Also, make sure you have a phone
signal (see the “Signal Strength
Indicator” item on page 28). Stay clear
of any obstructions such as bridges,
parking garages, or tall buildings.
I cannot hear
others on my
phone.
While on a call, press the volume key on
the left side of your phone. Your phone
display should show the volume
increasing.
Also, make sure that your phone’s
earpiece is not blocked by its carrying
case.
Problem Solution
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 164 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg16a.png)
165
Troubleshooting
I cannot open my
inbox.
Before you can use text or information
services messages, you must set up the
appropriate inbox. See “Setting Up the
Text Message Inbox” on page 113.
How do I see the
calls I sent or
received?
To see the most recent calls you dialed
or received, open the “Recent Calls”
lists:
M > Recent Calls
> Received Calls
or
Dialed Calls
My phone will
not send
voicemail
commands,
passwords, or
other codes.
Your phone sends commands and
passwords as DTMF tones. You can set
your phone’s DTMF tones to be Long,
Short, or Off. If you have trouble
sending numbers, check your DTMF
setting.
1
From the idle display, press:
M > Settings
> Other Settings
> Initial Setup
> DTMF
2
Press K to scroll to Long or Short.
3
Press SELECT (J) to select it.
Problem Solution
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 165 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg16b.png)
Troubleshooting
166
My phone’s
display is too
light.
You can use the Contrast Setting
feature (see page 76) to change the
level of contrast in your phone display.
You can also use the Backlight feature
(see page 75) to change the length of
time that your phone’s display backlight
stays on, or to change the display’s
backlight color.
My battery didn’t
last as long as I
expected. What
can I do to
extend battery
life?
Your battery’s performance is affected
by charge time, feature use,
temperature changes, and other factors.
For tips on extending your battery life,
see “Battery Use” on page 33.
I plugged the
data cable into
my phone but my
phone did not
beep. How do I
know if the data
cable is ready to
go?
The beep indicates that you are set up
correctly. If you did not hear a beep,
make sure that both ends of the data
cable are connected—the smaller end
to your phone and the larger end to
your computer.
Finally, your computer may have
deactivated the port to save power. Try
opening an application that uses the
port, like a fax or dial-up application,
and your computer will automatically
activate the port.
Problem Solution
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 166 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg16c.png)
167
Troubleshooting
My phone
beeped when I
attached the
data cable, but
my fax and data
applications
don’t work.
Some wireless networks may not
support data or fax transmission. If you
are roaming on an unfamiliar network,
this may be the case.
Also, remember that data and fax
transmission usually requires a
subscription. Call your service provider
for more information.
When sending
data with the
data cable, why
does the
computer show a
connection rate
of 19200 Kbps?
19200 Kbps is the data transfer rate of
the connection between your computer
and the phone in a standard CSD
(Circuit Switch Data) connection. The
rate of the connection between your
phone and the network is displayed on
your phone, and will be either 14400 or
9600 Kbps.
Note: A GPRS connection may have a
higher data transfer rate.
I can’t end my
data call by
closing the
application on
my computer.
What can I do?
Try pressing O on your phone. Also
try disconnecting the cable or turning
off the phone. If possible, always close
the connection through your computer.
These alternative methods may disrupt
the application on your computer.
Problem Solution
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 167 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg16d.png)
Troubleshooting
168
I launched the
micro-browser
but the display
says: Service Not
Available.
You may be in an area without service,
or you may be connected to a network
that does not support Internet access.
I launched the
micro-browser
but the display
says: Data Server
Unavailable.
Try again in a few minutes. The servers
may be temporarily busy.
Problem Solution
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 168 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
169
Product Registration
Online Product Registration:
http://www.motorola.com/warranty
Product registration is an important step toward enjoying your
new Motorola phone. Registering helps us facilitate warranty
service, and permits us to contact you should your phone require
an update or other service. Registration is not required for
warranty coverage.
Please retain your original dated sales receipt for your records.
For warranty service of your Motorola Personal Communications
Product you will need to provide a copy of your dated sales
receipt to confirm warranty status.
Thank you for choosing a Motorola product.
Export Law Assurances
This product is controlled under the export regulations of the
United States of America and Canada. The Governments of the
United States of America and Canada may restrict the
exportation or re-exportation of this product to certain
destinations. For further information contact the U.S.
Department of Commerce or the Canadian Department of
Foreign Affairs and International Trade.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 169 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg16f.png)
170
Specific Absorption Rate
Data
This model phone meets the government’s
requirements for exposure to radio waves.
Your mobile phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is
designed and manufactured not to exceed limits for exposure to
radio frequency (RF) energy. These limits are part of
comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF
energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on
standards that were developed by independent scientific
organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of
scientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety
margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of
age and health.
The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a unit of
measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR.
Under the guidelines for your phone model, the SAR limit is
2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard
operating positions with the phone transmitting at its highest
certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the
SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual
SAR of the phone while operating can be well below the
* The SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is
2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of tissue. The
limit incorporates a substantial margin for safety to give additional
protection for the public and to account for any variations in
measurements.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 170 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
171
maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to
operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power
required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a
base station, the lower the power output of the phone.
Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it is
tested to confirm compliance with the guidelines. The tests are
performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn
on the body) that conform to a uniform testing methodology
determined by an expert standards body. The highest SAR value
for this model phone when tested for use at the ear is 0.97 W/kg
and when worn on the body, as described in this user guide, is
0.52 W/kg. (Body-worn measurements differ among phone
models, depending upon available accessories and regulatory
requirements).
While there may be differences between the SAR levels of
various phones and at various positions, they all meet the
governmental requirements for safe exposure.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 171 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg171.png)
172
Index
A
accessories
optional 11, 108, 144, 148
standard 19
accessory connector port 1
active line indicator
defined 29
illustration 28
Add Digits feature 81
alert
creating 135–140
defined 133
indicators 30, 133
reminders 140
type, selecting 134
alert profile
customizing 134
defined 133
setting 133–134
alert setting indicator
defined 30, 133
illustration 28
animation 76
application, locking 73
appointments.
See
datebook
Attach Number feature 41,
81
automatic redial
turning on/off 75
using 35–36
B
backlight 75
barring calls 157
battery
car kit charger time 147
charging 22
extending battery life
33–34, 75, 76, 166
installing 19–??
level indicator 23, 28, 29
meter 69
blackjack 129–130
block cursor, defined 52
browse text mode 53
browser alerts 66
browser setup
micro-browser
browser setup 70
browser.
See
micro-browser
C
calculator 125–127
calendar.
See
datebook
call
adding digits after phone
number 81
alert profile, setting
133–134
alert type, selecting 134
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 172 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg172.png)
173
Index
alert, creating 135–140
answer options 72
answering 26
barring 157
call waiting 44
calling card 42
canceling 39
cost setup 71
costs 85–86
credit limit 71
deleting 79–81
dialed calls list 43, 79–81
dialing 25
dialing a recent call 79–81
emergency number 38
ending 25
hold 48
ignoring 39
in-call timer 70–71
placing 25
prefix digits, inserting 41
received calls list 43, 79–81
receiving 26
recent calls 79–81
sending 25
storing 79–81
talk then fax 152
terminating 39
timing 83
transferring 46–47
unanswered call 37
call barring 157
call cost information 85–86
Call Failed message 35
call forwarding
defined 141
status, checking 142–143
using 141–142
call timers
described 83
resetting 84
viewing 84
call waiting
activating/deactivating 72
using 44
caller ID
incoming calls 36
outgoing calls 71, 81
calling card call 42
calling line identification.
See
caller ID
car kit
automatic answer 145
automatic hands-free 145
charger time 147
power-off delay 146
clock
defined 30
illustration 28
codes.
See
passwords
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 173 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg173.png)
Index
174
computer
connecting to phone
149–150
synchronizing data 99, 148
conference call 45
contrast, display 76
cost trackers
described 85–86
resetting 86
viewing 86
credit available 69, 85
credit information 69, 85
currency converter 127
cursor 52
customer service, calling 65
customizing the menu 143
D
data call
connecting to external
device 149–150
receiving 151–152
sending 150–151
date, setting 74
datebook
adding an event 104
alarm 104
calendar 102
changing event information
105
copying an event 106
day view 103
deleting an event 107
event view 103
reminders 104, 140
week view 102
Datebook Menu 102, 103
default passwords 153
deleting a call 79–81
dialed calls list 43, 79–81
dialing a number 25
Dialing Menu 152
display
animation 76
backlight 75
contrast 76
described 27–30
greeting 74
idle display 27
illustration 28
language 76
zoom setting 30
drafts folder 66
DTMF tones 76, 80, 81, 165
E
earpiece
illustration 1
volume, adjusting 31
emergency number 38
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 174 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg174.png)
175
Index
end key
functions 1, 23, 25, 49
ending a call 25
Enter Unlock Code message
155, 156
Entry Method menu 58
event alert 134
exchange rate, calculating
127
external device
connecting to phone
149–150
synchronizing data 99, 148
F
factory settings, resetting
76–77
fax call
connecting to external
device 149–150
receiving 72, 151–152
sending 72, 150–151
talk then fax call 152
fixed dial
activating/deactivating 73
defined 64–65
dialing numbers 64–65
editing an entry 64–65, 94
storing an entry 88–90
flashing cursor, defined 52
flip
open to answer call 72
turning the phone on 23
FM Stereo Radio Headset
108–110
forwarding calls 141
4-way navigation keys 1, 49
frequency, changing 77, 160
G
games 128–132
GPRS indicator
defined 29
displayed 123
illustration 28
GPRS, defined 123
greeting, display 74
H
hands-free mode
automatic answer 145
automatic call routing 145
charger time 147
defined 144
power-off delay 146
headset
automatic answer 145
FM Stereo Radio Headset
108–110
headset jack 1
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 175 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg175.png)
Index
176
Hide ID feature 81
hold a call 48
I
idle display, defined 27
ignoring a call 39
in use indicator
defined 28
illustration 28
inbox, text message 113–114
in-call timer 70–71
incoming call
canceling 39
ignoring 39
terminating 39
Incoming Call message 36
indicators
active line 28, 29
alert setting 28, 30, 133
battery level 23, 28, 29
GPRS 28, 29, 123
in use 28
menu 27, 28, 30
message waiting 28, 29
missed call 37
ring alert 30, 133
roam 28
signal strength 28
silent alert 30, 133
vibrate alert 30, 133
voice message waiting 28,
29
voice name 87
iTAP software
activating 58
capitalization 61
deleting text 62
entering numbers 62
entering words 59–61
punctuation 61
K
key
end 1, 23, 25, 49
4-way navigation 1, 49
left soft key 1, 49, 144
menu 1, 26, 49
right soft key 1, 49, 144
send 1, 25, 26, 49, 79
voice 91–92
volume control 1, 31, 49
keypad
answering calls 72
volume, setting 134
L
language, setting 76
Last Calls Menu
opening 80
options 80–81
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 176 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg176.png)
177
Index
left soft key
customizing 144
functions 1, 49
lock
applications 73
phone 155–156
SIM card 158
lock application feature 73
loud ring alert 30, 133
M
making a call 25
master clear 77
master reset 76
menu
Browser Menu 124
customizing 143
Datebook Menu 102, 103
Dialing Menu 152
entering text 51–52, 53–62
Entry Method menu 58
features 63–78
language, setting 76
Last Calls Menu 80–81
lists 50
locking applications 73
My Tones Menu 138, 140
navigating 10, 49–50
Phonebook Menu 87
rearranging features 143
scroll feature 76
Text Msg Menu 116–117
using features 10, ??–52
menu indicator
defined 27, 30
illustration 28
menu key 1, 26, 49
message
browser alert 66
deleting 115–117
dialing number from 40
drafts folder 66
inbox setup 113–114
locking 115–117
outbox 66, 119
reading 115–117
receiving 115
reminders, text message
115, 140
reminders, voicemail 111,
140
sending 41, 117–119
status 119
voicemail 111–112
message waiting indicator
defined 29
illustration 28
micro-browser
browser alerts 66
Browser Menu 124
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 177 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg177.png)
Index
178
calling a phone number
124
defined 123
functions 124
go back to previous page
124
starting 123–124
microphone 1
mindblaster 130–132
missed call indicator 37
missed call, dialing 43
Missed Calls message 37
my telephone number 26, 48
my telephone numbers 69
my tones 135–140
My Tones Menu 138, 140
N
’n’ character 42
network settings 77, 160
notepad
defined 38
entering digits 38
retrieving digits 82
number, viewing your own 26,
48, 69
numeric text mode 53
O
1-touch dial
defined 40
setting preference 75, 101
using 40
optional accessory, defined 11
optional feature, defined 11
outbox 66, 119
P
paddleball 132
passwords
changing 153
default 153
if you forget a password
155
pause character 42
phone
accessories, optional 11
accessories, standard 19
active line indicator 29
active phone line, changing
69
answer options 72
connecting to external
device 149–150
credit available 69, 85
credit information 69
credit limit 71
date, setting 74
erase user-entered
information 77
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 178 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg178.png)
179
Index
feature specifications 70
flip 23
frequency, changing 77,
160
keypad, answering calls with
72
language, setting 76
locking 155–156
network settings 77, 160
1-touch dial 40
passwords 153, 155
reset all options 76
security code 155
specifications 70
speed dial, using 39
startup greeting 74
time, setting 74
unlock code 155
unlocking 24, 155–156
phone number
active line indicator 29
adding digits after 81
attaching to prefix digits 41
attaching two numbers 81
redialing 35
sending text message to 41
storing in phonebook
88–90
viewing your own 26, 48,
69
phonebook
attaching two numbers 81
capacity, checking 99
copying entries 95–98
deleting an entry 95
dialing a number 92
editing an entry 94
entry name 87
fields 87
number type indicator 87
1-touch dial 40
phone number 87
prefix digits, inserting 41
sorting entries 100–101
speed dial number 39, 87,
89–90
speed dial, using 39
storing an entry 88–90
synchronizing entries 99,
148
voice name entry 91–92
voice name indicator 87
Phonebook Menu 87
PIN code
activating/deactivating 158
defined 158
protecting the SIM card 158
unblocking 158–159
PIN2 code 65
predictive text entry
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 179 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg179.png)
Index
180
activating 58
capitalization 61
deleting text 62
entering numbers 62
entering words 59–61
punctuation 61
profile
customizing 134
defined 133
setting 133–134
PUK code 158
Q
quick dial
setting number 74
using 65
R
radio 108–110
received calls list 43, 79–81
receiving a call 26
recent calls 79–81
redial
automatic redial 35–36
busy number 35
reminders
datebook 104
setting 140
text message 115, 140
voicemail message 111,
140
right soft key
customizing 144
functions 1, 49
ring alert
creating 135–140
indicators 30, 133
setting 133–134
type, selecting 134
ring and vibrate alert
indicator 30, 133
ringer
setting 133–134
volume, adjusting 31, 134
roam indicator
defined 28
illustration 28
S
scroll feature 76
security code 155
send key 1, 25, 26, 49, 79
sending a call 25
service dial
defined 64
short message service.
See
text
message
shortcuts
creating 121
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 180 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg17a.png)
181
Index
standard 120
using 122
Show ID feature 81
signal strength indicator
defined 28
illustration 28
silent alert indicator 30, 133
SIM applications 67
SIM Blocked message 24,
158
SIM card
applications 67
defined 19
installing 19–??
precautions 19
protecting 158
service phone numbers 64
SIM Blocked message 24,
158
SIM Disabled message 159
unblocking 158–159
SIM Disabled message 159
SIM PIN code
activating/deactivating 158
protecting the SIM card 158
unblocking 158–159
SIM PIN2 code 65
SMS.
See
text message
soft keys
customizing 144
illustration 1, 49
soft ring alert 30, 133
speed dial
changing number 89–90
number, defined 39
sorting phonebook entries
by 100
using 39
standby time
increasing 33
storing a call 79–81
symbol text mode 57–58
symbols, entering 57–58
synchronizing data 99, 148
T
talk and fax call 72
talk then fax call 152
tap method text entry 54–56
telephone number, viewing
your own 26, 48, 69
text
block cursor 52
browse mode 53
character chart 56
entering from keypad
53–62
entry mode, changing 53
flashing cursor 52
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 181 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg17b.png)
Index
182
iTAP software predictive text
entry 58–62
numeric mode 53
symbol chart 58
symbol mode 57–58
tap method 54–56
text message
deleting 115–117
dialing number from 40
inbox setup 113–114
locking 115–117
reading 115–117
receiving 115
reminders 115, 140
sending 41, 117–119
status 119
text mode, changing 53
Text Msg Menu
opening 116
options 116–117
time, setting 74
timers
described 83
resetting 84
viewing 84
transfer a call 46–47
TrueSync 99, 148
U
unblocking the SIM card
158–159
unlock
phone 155–156
unlock code 155
V
vibrate alert
indicator 30, 133
setting 133–134
type, selecting 134
voice dial
dialing a number 93
recording voice name
91–92
voice key
recording a voice name
91–92
voice message waiting
indicator 28, 29
voice name
defined 91
phonebook indicator 87
recording 91–92
voicemail
number, storing 111
receiving 111–112
volume
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 182 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg17c.png)
183
Index
earpiece 31
keypad 134
ringer 31, 134
volume key 31
volume keys 1, 49
W
wait character 42
Web pages
functions 124
viewing 123–124
Z
zoom setting 30
U.S. patent Re. 34,976
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 183 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg17d.png)
Index
184
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 184 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg17e.png)
✂
185
Wireless Phone Safety Tips
“Safety is your most important call!”
Your Motorola wireless telephone gives you
the powerful ability to communicate by voice—
almost anywhere, anytime, wherever wireless
phone service is available and safe conditions allow.
But an important responsibility accompanies the
benefits of wireless phones, one that every user
must uphold.
When driving a car, driving is your first
responsibility. If you find it necessary to use your
wireless phone while behind the wheel of a car,
practice good common sense and remember the
following tips:
1
Get to know your Motorola wireless phone and its
features such as speed dial and redial. If available,
these features help you to place your call without taking your
attention off the road.
2
When available, use a hands-free device. If possible,
add an additional layer of convenience to your wireless
phone with one of the many Motorola Original™ hands-free
accessories available today.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 185 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg17f.png)
186
3
Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Be
able to access your wireless phone without removing your
eyes from the road. If you receive an incoming call at an
inconvenient time, if possible, let your voice mail answer it for
you.
4
Let the person you are speaking with know you are
driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic
or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice,
and even heavy traffic can be hazardous.
5
If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient
time do not take notes or look up phone numbers
while driving. Jotting down a “to do” list or going through
your address book takes attention away from your primary
responsibility—driving safely.
6
Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place
calls when you are not moving or before pulling into
traffic. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If
you need to make a call while moving, dial only a few
numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue.
7
Do not engage in stressful or emotional
conversations that may be distracting. Make people you
are talking with aware you are driving and suspend
conversations which have the potential to divert your
attention away from the road.
8
Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1 or
other local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic
accident or medical emergencies.*
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 186 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg180.png)
187
9
Use your wireless phone to help others in
emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress
or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call
9-1-1 or other local emergency number, as you would want
others to do for you.*
10
Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency
wireless assistance number when necessary. If you see
a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken
traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears
injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside
assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number.*
* Wherever wireless phone service is available.
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 187 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM
![](/img.php?id=235445&img=bg181.png)
188
Check the laws and regulations on the use of
wireless telephones and their accessories in the
areas where you drive. Always obey them. The use
of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in
certain areas.
For more information,
please call
1-888-901-SAFE
or visit the
CTIA Web site at
www.wow-com.com™
ITC00-011
User.Guide.GSM.book Page 188 Wednesday, January 9, 2002 2:30 PM